2022 BMW 5 Series 4 Door CONTROLS User Manual

MY CAR USER MANUAL

CONTROLS for Your BMW 5 Series 4 Door 2022

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
2
3
Roller sunblind in the rear win‐  
dowꢀꢁ109  
Memory functionꢀꢁ125  
Massage functionꢀꢁ125  
Safety switchꢀꢁ109  
6
Lights  
Power windowsꢀꢁ108  
Light switchꢀꢁ173  
4
5
Exterior mirror adjustment buttonꢀꢁ122  
Seating comfort features  
Lights off  
Daytime driving lightsꢀꢁ175  
30  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Parking lightsꢀꢁ174  
Manual Speed Limiterꢀꢁ218  
Automatic headlight controlꢀꢁ173  
Adaptive light functionsꢀꢁ175  
Depending on the equipment:  
Cruise control on/offꢀꢁ220  
Automatic High Beam Assis‐  
tantꢀꢁ176  
Low beamsꢀꢁ174  
Depending on the equipment:  
Active Cruise Control on/offꢀꢁ222  
Instrument lightingꢀꢁ178  
Right roadside parking lightꢀꢁ174  
Left roadside parking lightꢀꢁ174  
With steering and traffic jam assis‐  
tantꢀꢁ232:  
Cruise control, distance control and  
lane guidance on/off  
Cruise control: to store the speed  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐  
gested speedꢀꢁ230  
7
8
Central locking systemꢀꢁ95  
Unlocking  
Pausing cruise control  
Locking  
Continuing cruise control  
Steering column stalk, left  
Turn signalꢀꢁ143  
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐  
tance  
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐  
tance  
High beams, headlight flasherꢀꢁ144  
Cruise control rocker switch  
Automatic High Beam Assis‐  
tantꢀꢁ176  
10 Instrument clusterꢀꢁ153  
11 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Selection listsꢀꢁ168  
Instrument cluster with enhanced  
features:  
Widgetsꢀꢁ155  
Trip dataꢀꢁ168  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communicationꢀꢁ6  
9
Steering wheel buttons, left  
Voice activation systemꢀꢁ50  
31  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Changing the station/track, see  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐  
tertainment, Communicationꢀꢁ6  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Horn, entire surface  
Steering wheel heatingꢀꢁ124  
Adjusting the steering wheelꢀꢁ124  
Unlocking the hoodꢀꢁ358  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communicationꢀꢁ6  
Thumbwheel for selection listsꢀꢁ168  
12 Steering column stalk, right  
Wipersꢀꢁ144  
Opening and closing the trunk  
lidꢀꢁ100  
Rain sensorꢀꢁ145  
Cleaning the windshieldꢀꢁ146  
19 Glove compartmentꢀꢁ300  
13  
Turning drive readiness state on/  
offꢀꢁ135  
Auto Start/Stop functionꢀꢁ135  
32  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
2
3
Control Displayꢀꢁ45  
Ventilationꢀꢁ278  
9
Parking assistance systemsꢀꢁ241  
Panorama Viewꢀꢁ261  
Hazard warning systemꢀꢁ374  
Intelligent Safetyꢀꢁ184  
10  
Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ138  
SPORT driving mode  
4
5
Glove compartmentꢀꢁ299  
COMFORT driving mode  
ECO PRO driving mode  
ADAPTIVE driving mode  
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐  
tionꢀꢁ6  
6
7
8
Automatic climate controlꢀꢁ273  
Controller with buttonsꢀꢁ46  
Parking brakeꢀꢁ140  
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐  
trolꢀꢁ213  
Automatic Holdꢀꢁ142  
11 Steptronic transmission: selector leverꢀꢁ147  
33  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
2
3
Emergency Call, SOSꢀꢁ376  
4
5
Reading lightsꢀꢁ178  
Interior lightsꢀꢁ178  
Operating the electric glass sun‐  
roofꢀꢁ110  
Indicator light, front passenger air‐  
bagꢀꢁ183  
34  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Cameras  
Front camera  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Front camera  
Overview  
Cameras behind the windshield  
Depending on the equipment, the following cam‐  
eras and sensors are installed in the vehicle:  
▷ Front camera.  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ Top view cameras.  
▷ Rearview camera.  
▷ Front radar sensor.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.  
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The cameras are located in the area of the inte‐  
rior mirror.  
Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well  
as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed.  
35  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷ Camera behind the windshield: if the camera  
Top view cameras  
has overheated and been temporarily  
switched off due to excessively high temper‐  
atures.  
▷ Camera behind the windshield: during cali‐  
bration of the camera immediately after vehi‐  
cle delivery.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐  
terior mirror housing.  
Radar sensors  
Front radar sensor  
Rearview camera  
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper.  
The camera is located in the handle of the trunk  
lid.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not be fully functional and may  
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐  
uations:  
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight  
curves.  
▷ When the camera field of view is covered, for  
instance by a fogged up windshield or labels.  
The radar sensors are located in the bumper.  
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.  
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.  
▷ When it is dark outside.  
36  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
Ultrasound sensors  
Ultrasound sensors in the front/  
rear bumpers  
The ultrasound sensors of the  
Park Distance Control PDC are lo‐  
cated in the bumpers.  
The radar sensors are located in the bumper.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
System limits of the radar  
sensors  
The radar sensors may not be fully functional or  
may not be available in the following situations:  
▷ If sensors are dirty, such as due to icing.  
▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels,  
films or a number plate baseplate.  
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐  
stance due to parking damage.  
The ultrasound sensors of the Automatic Parking  
Assistant are located on the side of the vehicle.  
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov‐  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the  
following situations:  
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov‐  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow hills,  
vehicles or trailers.  
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷ In case of dirty sensors.  
▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the road.  
▷ In case of covered sensors, such as due to la‐  
bels.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐  
stance due to parking damage.  
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷ For small children and animals.  
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance  
jacket.  
▷ In case of external interference of the ultra‐  
sound, for instance from passing vehicles,  
loud machines or other ultrasonic sources.  
37  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
relative atmospheric humidity, wet conditions,  
snowfall, cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.  
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other  
vehicles.  
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
▷ With moving objects.  
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure  
such as fences.  
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.  
▷ With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷ With plants and bushes.  
▷ In automatic car washes.  
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.  
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.  
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
38  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
General information  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one  
of the three states:  
▷ Idle state.  
Warning  
▷ Standby state.  
▷ Drive-ready state.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
Idle state  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
Principle  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from  
the outside and after exiting and locking.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
Automatic idle state  
For instance, the idle state is automatically es‐  
tablished under the following conditions:  
39  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
OFF is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster. The drivetrain is  
switched off and standby state  
switched on.  
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive: when  
one or both front doors are opened after driv‐  
ing when exiting the vehicle.  
In some situations, the idle state is not set auto‐  
matically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low beams are switched on.  
Drive readiness  
Principle  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose, the  
driver and front passenger must exit the vehicle.  
General information  
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability  
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state  
switched on.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Safety information  
DANGER  
Manual idle state  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐  
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into  
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐  
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐  
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐  
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to  
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐  
ficient ventilation.  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com‐  
pletion of trip:  
Press and hold the button on the  
radio until the OFF indicator on  
the instrument cluster goes out.  
Standby state  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
Principle  
When standby state is switched on, most func‐  
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.  
Desired settings can be adjusted.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
General information  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front  
doors are opened from the outside.  
40  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
Additional information:  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
Power gauge, refer to page 162.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
The activated drive readiness is indicated in the  
instrument cluster, depending on the equipment,  
by the display of information required for driving  
or the READY display.  
NOTICE  
Turning off drive-ready state  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐  
hicle stopped.  
Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or re‐  
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid succes‐  
sion can cause the starter to overheat. This  
also results in unburned or inadequately burned  
fuel, and can cause the catalytic converter to  
overheat. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Avoid repeated  
starting of the vehicle, particularly repeated  
starting in rapid succession.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
3. Set the parking brake.  
Turning on drive readiness  
Principle  
Drive-ready state is switched on  
via the Start/Stop button.  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief  
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.  
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐  
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.  
Gasoline engine  
Depending on the motorization, the full drive  
power may not be available for approximately  
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,  
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.  
41  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
iDrive  
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Input and display  
Main menu  
General information  
The main menu is divided into two areas. The  
left area contains menu items that can be used  
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area  
contains widgets that provide quick access to  
certain functions.  
Operating concept  
Principle  
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐  
ment system and includes a large number of  
functions.  
General information  
These functions can be operated as follows:  
Media/Radio  
▷ Via the Controller.  
All functions of the entertainment system,  
e.g., radio stations or connection with external  
devices.  
▷ Via the touchscreen.  
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
▷ Depending on the equipment: with the ges‐  
ture control.  
Communication  
Phone and message functions, e-mail and  
calendar, and also the connection and manage‐  
ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Navigation  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control  
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐  
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the  
Access to the navigation system, destination  
input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map  
views and other functions, such as points of in‐  
terest and areas to be avoided.  
42  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
My Car  
Information about vehicle status and trips.  
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered  
during entry for which data is available.  
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and  
also administration of driver profiles and range of  
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.  
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐  
tered in all languages that are available in  
iDrive.  
Apps  
Activating/deactivating the  
functions  
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐  
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐  
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the  
menu item activates or deactivates the function.  
Management of apps, access to apps and ve‐  
hicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle func‐  
tions can be purchased from the BMW Store.  
Widgets  
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐  
quently used functions. The configured widgets  
display dynamic contents such as the navigation  
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Status information  
Letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can be selected when mak‐  
ing the destination input, for example.  
General information  
The status field can be found in the upper area of  
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐  
played in the form of symbols.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
Controller, the touchpad, touchscreen or voice  
control. The keyboard's display changes auto‐  
matically.  
Radio symbols  
Icon  
Meaning  
Icon  
Function  
HD Radio station is being received.  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Telephone symbols  
Icon Meaning  
Incoming or outgoing call.  
Confirm entry.  
Missed call.  
Slide the input area to the left or  
right.  
Signal strength of mobile phone net‐  
work.  
Entry comparison  
Network search.  
When entering names and addresses, the choice  
is narrowed down with every letter and number  
and added automatically as needed.  
Mobile phone network is not available.  
The critical charge state of the mobile  
phone has been reached.  
Entries are continuously compared with data  
stored in the vehicle.  
43  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Icon Meaning  
Icon Meaning  
Roaming is active.  
Locating is active.  
Stop.  
Data protection.  
SMS text message received.  
Message received.  
Reminder.  
Destination guidance active.  
Passengers on board.  
Do not disturb.  
Sending not possible.  
Programmable memory buttons  
General information  
Entertainment symbols  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐  
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐  
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐  
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Bluetooth audio.  
USB device.  
Connected Music.  
WLAN.  
Overview  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Other symbols  
Icon Meaning  
Check Control message.  
Programmable memory buttons  
Sound output active.  
Sound output deactivated.  
Voice activation system active.  
Storing a function  
A function can be stored on a programmable  
memory button. A button with a stored function  
can be overwritten with another function.  
Request for the current vehicle posi‐  
tion.  
1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio  
station.  
Checking the current vehicle position.  
Driver profile.  
2.  
Press and hold the desired button  
until the displayed bar on the Control Display  
has loaded completely.  
Notifications.  
Service notifications.  
Information.  
44  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Executing a function  
Control Display  
Safety information  
Press the button.  
The function will work immediately. This means,  
for instance that the number is dialed when a  
phone number is selected.  
NOTICE  
Objects in the area in the front of the Control  
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐  
play. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Do not place  
objects in the area in front of the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Displaying the key assignment  
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or  
use objects.  
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in  
the upper area of the Control Display.  
Switching on/off automatically  
Deleting all button assignments  
All button assignments can be deleted.  
The Control Display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and  
ously for approx. 5 seconds.  
simultane‐  
In certain situations, the Control Display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐  
eration is performed on the vehicle for several  
minutes.  
2. "OK"  
Control Display and  
Controller  
Switching on/off manually  
The Control Display can also be switched off  
manually.  
Principle  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control  
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐  
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touchscreen.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Screen off"  
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐  
troller to switch it back on again.  
Overview  
System limits  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar  
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down  
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature  
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐  
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.  
1
2
Control Display with touchscreen  
Controller with buttons and touchpad  
45  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Buttons on the Controller  
Controller  
Button Function  
General information  
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐  
rectly. The Controller can be used to select  
menu items and enter the settings.  
Go to the main menu.  
Go to the Media/Radio menu.  
Go to the Communication menu.  
Go to navigation map.  
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the  
touchpad on the Controller.  
Operation  
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐  
ample.  
Go to destination input menu for navi‐  
gation.  
Go to the previous display.  
Go to the Options menu.  
Operating via the  
Controller  
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐  
plays, for example.  
The main menu is displayed.  
46  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting contents  
Selecting a menu  
Depending on the equipment, the contents of  
menus "MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" can be ad‐  
justed, for instance to remove the entries of  
functions that are not used from the menu.  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
2. Press the Controller.  
1. Select the menu.  
2. "Personalize menu"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Select a widget  
1. Move the Controller in the main menu to the  
right.  
Changing between displays  
After a menu item is selected, for instance  
"Settings", a new display appears.  
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is  
selected.  
3. Press the Controller.  
▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.  
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐  
ment cluster.  
The current display closes and the previous  
display is shown.  
Adjusting the menu  
Adjusting widgets  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.  
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐  
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments  
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
▷
Press the button.  
The previous display re-opens.  
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.  
The new display opens.  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be  
opened.  
Going to the Options menu  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐  
justed.  
Press the button.  
2. Tip the Controller up.  
The "Options" menu is displayed.  
3. "Adjust main menu"  
The menu consists of various areas, for instance:  
4. Select the desired adjustment:  
▷ "MEDIA": control options for the selected  
main menu.  
▷
Symbol and select desired widget: add  
new widget.  
▷ "Help": help for the selected menu.  
▷ "Control display off": system settings.  
The requested widget will be inserted in  
the relevant position. A maximum of four  
widgets can be displayed per page.  
Entering letters and numbers  
▷
Select icon: delete selected widget.  
Input  
▷ Add new page: "Add page".  
1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number.  
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page".  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select  
widget.  
5. "Done"  
47  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting  
Entering special characters  
Icon Function  
Input  
Operation  
Press the Controller: delete letter or  
number.  
Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the  
ter.  
touchpad.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let‐  
ters or numbers.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐  
per area of the touchpad.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,  
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐  
played in a text box.  
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touchpad.  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be moved  
via the touchpad.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐  
played in the list.  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di‐  
rection.  
Operation via touchpad  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out on the touch‐  
pad with fingers.  
General information  
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the  
touchpad on the Controller.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries per‐  
mit a direct jump to letters for which an entry ex‐  
ists.  
Selecting functions  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed in  
the list.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Operation via touchscreen  
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the  
Control Display.  
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
General information  
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐  
screen.  
▷ The set language determines what input is  
possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch  
the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not use  
any objects.  
48  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐  
play bar at the top edge of the screen.  
Opening the main menu  
Tap on the icon.  
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar  
at the top edge of the screen.  
Changing between displays  
After a menu item is selected, a new display  
opens.  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be  
opened.  
▷ Swipe to the left.  
▷ Tap arrow.  
The main menu is displayed.  
The new display opens.  
Adjusting widgets  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.  
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐  
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments  
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
1. Depending on the equipment version, tap  
the  
icon on the touchscreen or a key‐  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐  
justed.  
board is displayed on the Control Display  
when the touchscreen is approached.  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
2.  
Tap the icon in the main menu.  
Deleting  
3. Select the desired adjustment:  
▷
Tap icon and select desired widget:  
add new widget.  
Icon Function  
Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or  
number.  
The requested widget will be inserted in  
the relevant position. A maximum of four  
widgets can be displayed per page.  
Tapping and holding the icon all letters:  
deletes all letters or numbers.  
▷
Tap icon: delete selected widget.  
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".  
▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page".  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved using the  
touchscreen.  
▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of  
widget.  
4. Tap "Done".  
Showing/hiding the display bar  
In the upper area of the Control Display, it is pos‐  
sible to show or hide a display bar with additional  
functions.  
49  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Function  
Operation  
▷ A language that is supported by the Personal  
Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di‐  
rection.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 62.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin‐  
gers.  
▷ Always say commands in the configured sys‐  
tem language.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Enter the following settings to access the full  
range of functions:  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,  
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐  
played in a text box.  
▷ "Online speech processing" is activated.  
▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive"  
activated.  
▷ Activation word is activated.  
▷ The Driver profile is activated.  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under  
"Personalization" is activated.  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services pur‐  
chased from the ConnectedDrive Store.  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
Activating the voice control  
system  
Principle  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a per‐  
sonal assistant that enables natural voice opera‐  
tion of various vehicle functions. The Personal  
Assistant simplifies the operation of the vehicle  
with the automation of processes and habits.  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
General information  
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is availa‐  
ble depending on the national-market ver‐  
sion.  
The microphone on the driver's side is active.  
▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal  
wake word.  
The microphones on the driver's or front pas‐  
senger's side are active with the following  
voice control, depending on where the activa‐  
tion word was spoken.  
▷ The system includes special microphones on  
the driver side and the front passenger side.  
▷ Say commands at a normal volume. Speaking  
directly into the microphone does not im‐  
prove the speech recognition.  
Then say the command. The activation word and  
the command can be spoken without pause in  
one sentence. No other commands may be avail‐  
able. In this case, operate the function via iDrive.  
▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently as  
well as with normal volume, emphasis, and  
speed.  
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spoken.  
50  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Activation word from third-party providers  
Button on the steering wheel  
Depending on the national-market version, some  
third-party providers provide digital voice assis‐  
tants, e.g., Siri, Amazon Alexa or Google Assis‐  
tant.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
2. Say the command.  
Supported voice assistants can be used with a  
connected smartphone in the vehicle. In addition  
to the preset or personal activation word, the ac‐  
tivation word from connected third-party provid‐  
ers can be used.  
Wake word  
General information  
Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐  
sonal wake word will start the system.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Preset wake word  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐  
vated and deactivated.  
1. "CAR"  
6. "Third-party providers"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
6. "Wake word"  
Ending voice control  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
▷ ›Cancel‹  
7. "Wake word"  
Personal wake word  
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right or left.  
▷ Press the Controller.  
In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello  
BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set up  
in the active driver profile. The personal activa‐  
tion word can also be changed or deleted.  
Possible commands  
General information  
Most contents on the Control Display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐  
tries. Say list entries as shown.  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition. An addition,  
such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Instructions can be issued or questions can be  
asked where the Personal Assistant provides  
support.  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
6. "Wake word"  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set wake word"  
9. Select the desired setting.  
51  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The voice control system and the feedback it  
provides does not replace the printed or  
Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech recog‐  
nition and quality of the feedback may vary.  
Function examples  
Vehicle status and vehicle information  
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
▷ ›Show me the sport displays.‹  
▷ ›Open Owner's Manual.‹  
›How can the passenger airbag be deactivated‹  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback. When  
stationary, the section of the integrated Owner's  
Manual is displayed on the Control Display.  
Navigation  
▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road,  
Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹  
Menu items  
The commands of the menu items are spoken  
just as they are selected via the Controller.  
▷ ›Take me home.‹  
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages?‹  
1. Activating the voice control system.  
2. ›MEDIA‹  
Communication  
3. ›Presets‹  
For example, when a mobile phone is connected,  
calls can be started or SMS can be sent.  
The stored stations are displayed on the Control  
Display.  
▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹  
▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹  
Help for voice control  
▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right  
there.‹  
▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have the available spo‐  
ken commands announced.  
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
Entertainment  
▷ ›What song is this?‹  
▷ ›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹  
▷ ›Next title.‹  
▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read  
out loud.  
Climate control  
Settings  
▷ ›Turn off the air conditioning.‹  
▷ ›Activate fresh air.‹  
▷ ›I'm cold.‹  
Setting the voice control  
You can set the system to use standard dialog or  
a short version.  
Windows and light  
The short version of the voice control plays back  
short messages in abbreviated form.  
▷ ›Open the windows automatically.‹  
▷ ›Delete activation point for automatic power  
window.‹  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷ ›Ambient lighting.‹  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
52  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
6. "Response length"  
The device must be connected via Apple Car‐  
Play or Android Auto.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
1.  
Press and hold the button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
Speaking during voice output  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
voice activation system. The function can be de‐  
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐  
rupted, for instance due to background noise or  
conversations in the vehicle.  
The voice activation of the smartphone is ac‐  
tivated.  
2.  
Release the button.  
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐  
pears on the Control Display.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
Automating routines  
General information  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic activation of the seat  
heating from a specific outside temperature.  
Rules are created for this purpose, which can be  
activated and deactivated at any time.  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
Online speech processing  
Online voice processing improves the quality of  
the speech recognition and search results for  
points of interest. To use the functions, data is  
transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted  
connection and stored locally there.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "APPS"  
2. "Installed apps"  
1. "CAR"  
3. "Personal assistant"  
4. "Automate habits"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
Caring Car  
Principle  
Different vehicle functions in the car's interior are  
harmonized for the driver in a short-term pro‐  
gram.  
6. "Online speech processing"  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid‐  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
The volume remains constant even if the volume  
of other audio sources is changed.  
General information  
By selecting a program, the interior lighting, cli‐  
mate control and music selection will be ad‐  
justed. A program takes 3 minutes.  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con‐  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice con‐  
trol.  
53  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
Overview  
2. "Caring Car"  
3. Select the desired program.  
The program can be stopped prematurely:  
"End program"  
Adjusting a program  
1. "CAR"  
The camera in the headliner detects gestures  
that are carried out in the area of the center con‐  
sole at the height of the Control Display.  
2. "Caring Car"  
3. Select the desired program.  
4. "Music settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
System limits  
▷ The Personal Assistant provides information  
about vehicle functions that may not be in‐  
stalled in the vehicle.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
5. "Gesture control"  
This also applies to safety-related functions  
and systems.  
Settings  
1. "CAR"  
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead  
to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and  
glass sunroof closed.  
2. "Settings"  
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the occu‐  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems  
with the speech recognition feature.  
Carrying out gestures  
▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐  
ror and next to the steering wheel.  
▷ A poor data connection influences the re‐  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
the Search.  
▷ Execute gestures clearly.  
▷ The gestures can also be executed from the  
front-passenger side.  
BMW Gesture Control  
Principle  
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand  
motion using BMW Gesture Control.  
54  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Possible gestures  
Gesture  
Operation  
Function  
Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐ Accept call.  
rection of the screen.  
Select a highlighted entry in a  
list during voice control.  
Confirm pop-up.  
Move hand across the width of the Control Display Reject call.  
in the direction of the front-passenger side.  
Close pop-up.  
End voice control.  
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern  
with the index finger stretched out forward.  
Increase the volume.  
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.  
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circular Reduce the volume.  
pattern with the index finger stretched out forward.  
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.  
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand Surround View: turn camera  
horizontally to the right or left.  
view.  
This gesture can only be exe‐  
cuted while the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐  
ward.  
Individually assignable gesture.  
Move fist with thumb extended to the left back and Reverse Skip function.  
forth.  
The previous title is played.  
55  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Gesture  
Operation  
Function  
Move fist with thumb extended to right left back  
and forth.  
Forward Skip function.  
The next title is played.  
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch five  
fingers out again.  
Individually assignable gesture.  
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐  
tection range.  
Assigning gesture individually  
General information  
Two gestures can be assigned individually and  
can be configured for certain functions, such as:  
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.  
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.  
▷ Destination guidance to home address.  
▷ Mute/Playback  
▷ Control Display on/off  
Select function  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or  
"Function assignment gesture 2"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
Gesture recognition by the camera in the head‐  
liner can be disturbed by the following circum‐  
stances:  
▷ The camera lens is covered.  
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.  
▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera lens.  
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to  
page 384.  
56  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
Functional requirement  
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
▷ Cellular network reception.  
▷ A consent for the transmission of the corre‐  
sponding data was given in the Data Protec‐  
tion menu.  
Principle  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhancements  
or quality improvements available.  
Search for an upgrade  
Standby must be turned on to search for a soft‐  
ware upgrade.  
General information  
Automatic search  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐  
ble.  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in the  
background.  
Manual search  
1. "CAR"  
Safety information  
2. "Settings"  
Warning  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
57  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
successfully, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the Control Display.  
Download of an upgrade  
Automatic download  
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade  
is automatically loaded into the vehicle. The  
download does not require an approval.  
This information is also available in the Connec‐  
tedDrive customer portal.  
Displaying information  
Display in the vehicle:  
Via BMW app  
1. "CAR"  
If an upgrade is available, information about the  
new software version is displayed in the BMW  
app.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Info about version"  
The data for the upgrade can then be down‐  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an ex‐  
isting WLAN connection.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.  
The data can then be transmitted from the mo‐  
bile device to the vehicle.  
This transmission method accelerates the down‐  
load of the data, for instance in areas with limited  
mobile network availability.  
Installing the upgrade  
General information  
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to  
the smartphone.  
▷ The installation of the upgrade may result in a  
deletion of software changes such as per‐  
formance increases that have not been instal‐  
led by the manufacturer of the vehicle.  
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.  
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.  
▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and WLAN.  
▷ Android: connect WLAN.  
▷ The installation may take approx. 20 minutes.  
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.  
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐  
lation.  
The data transfer of the upgrade from the  
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the  
background only while driving.  
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐  
tion.  
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
▷ The installation does not occur until the con‐  
sent was given.  
Additional information:  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer  
to page 71.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.  
▷ The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
Information about the version  
General information  
The information about the version contains a de‐  
scription of the updates that are included in the  
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download  
and after the installation has been completed  
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.  
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off.  
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.  
58  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷ Engine is turned off and sufficiently cooled  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
down.  
▷ Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning is  
not activated via iDrive.  
▷ Hazard warning system.  
If applicable, follow the notes for further prerequi‐  
sites on the control display.  
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi‐  
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade  
will not be offered for installation.  
▷ Parking lights.  
▷ Horn.  
▷ Alarm system.  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, for in‐  
stance after extended driving.  
▷ Emergency call.  
▷ Power windows.  
▷ Operation of the tailgate.  
▷ Glass sunroof.  
Preparing the vehicle  
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.  
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent, for in‐  
stance if the installation is terminated.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
▷ Close the windows.  
▷ Close the glass sunroof.  
▷ Close the trunk lid.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
Booked services, such as RTTI or Remote Serv‐  
ices, will be reactivated automatically during the  
next trip.  
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as  
a mobile phone.  
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐  
cle for the consent for installation.  
After an extended stationary period, charge the  
vehicle battery with an extended drive.  
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.  
▷ Remove connected devices from the OBD  
socket.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐  
tions on the control display or in the BMW app.  
Starting installation  
The upgrade can be installed when all prerequi‐  
sites have been met.  
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a  
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐  
ice center or repair shop.  
1. "CAR"  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the printed  
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
59  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
After a software update in the  
vehicle  
After a vehicle software update, such as via Re‐  
mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's  
Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐  
formation.  
60  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
General settings  
CONTROLS  
General settings  
Setting the time format  
1. "CAR"  
Vehicle features and  
options  
2. "Settings"  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time format:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Automatic time setting  
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,  
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are  
updated automatically.  
Time  
1. "CAR"  
Setting the time zone  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Automatic time setting"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time zone:"  
Date  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the date  
1. "CAR"  
Setting the time  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date:"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time:"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is  
displayed.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are  
displayed.  
7. Press the Controller.  
8. Make the settings for the month and year.  
9. "OK"  
7. Press the Controller.  
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes  
are displayed.  
9. "OK"  
61  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
data to analyze the attention of the driver. This  
system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐  
tems, e.g.:  
Setting the date format  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷ Fatigue alert.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date format:"  
▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with Ex‐  
tended Traffic Jam Assistant.  
Activating/deactivating  
1. "CAR"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
Language  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Driver Attention Camera"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the system language  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
functional in the following situations:  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered  
by the steering wheel rim.  
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐  
able sunglasses.  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
Trip data settings  
Depending on the country version, you can set  
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐  
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐  
ture.  
Principle  
The intervals in which the trip data will be reset  
can be configured.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Resetting trip data  
1. "CAR"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Units"  
2. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired menu item.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Reset trip data"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Driver Attention Camera  
Principle  
A camera that monitors driver activity is located  
in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates  
the head position and eye opening and uses the  
62  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Speed warning  
Activating/deactivating  
pop-ups  
Principle  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed auto‐  
matically on the Control Display. Some of these  
pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
2. "Settings"  
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐  
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐  
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Adjusting  
1. "CAR"  
Control Display  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Warning at:"  
Brightness  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is  
displayed.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Press the Controller.  
7. Press the Controller.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐  
ness is set.  
2. "Settings"  
8. Press the Controller.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Speed warning"  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐  
ness settings may not be clearly visible.  
Accept current speed as the  
speed warning  
1. "CAR"  
Reset vehicle data  
All individual settings can be reset to the factory  
settings when the drive-ready state is switched  
off.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Select current speed"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
63  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
When the stored settings in a driver profile are  
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,  
these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive  
account.  
3. Select desired notifications.  
4. Press the button.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Settings  
Notifications  
It is possible to set which notifications are per‐  
mitted and which notifications will be displayed at  
the start of the trip and at the completion of the  
trip.  
Principle  
The menu centrally displays all notifications arriv‐  
ing in the vehicle in form of a list.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
General information  
The following notifications can be displayed:  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
▷ Traffic messages.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷ Check Control messages.  
▷ Messages on service notifications.  
Display, notifications  
General information  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants allows  
the configuration of the range of messages that  
will be displayed. Depending on the situation, the  
desired condition can be activated.  
▷ Communication messages, for example e-  
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.  
▷ Messages, for instance from the BMW app.  
▷ Messages from the manufacturer of the vehi‐  
cle, for instance technical information or im‐  
portant customer information.  
The number of notifications is additionally dis‐  
played in the status field.  
Condition  
Description  
"Do not  
disturb"  
Incoming calls and non-critical  
notifications are not displayed.  
Go to notifications  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
Icon is shown in the status  
information with the number of  
messages.  
3. Select desired notification.  
"Passenger  
on board"  
Private contents, such as mes‐  
sages, will not be displayed di‐  
rectly.  
Delete notifications  
All notifications, except Check Control messages  
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can  
be deleted from the list.  
Icon is shown in the status  
information with the number of  
messages.  
Check Control messages or messages from the  
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as  
they are relevant.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
64  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
General settings  
CONTROLS  
4. "Notification display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
65  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
Deleting personal data in the  
vehicle  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Principle  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐  
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This  
personal data can be permanently deleted using  
iDrive.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following data  
is deleted:  
▷ Driver profile settings.  
▷ Stored radio stations.  
Data protection  
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.  
▷ Travel and trip computer information.  
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.  
▷ Phone book.  
Data transmission  
Principle  
The vehicle offers different services, whose use  
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐  
vider. The data transmission can be deactivated  
for some services.  
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.  
▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.  
▷ Login accounts.  
▷ Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive account.  
General information  
When the data transmission is deactivated, the  
respective service cannot be used.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up  
to 15 minutes.  
Functional requirement  
Only make these settings while stationary.  
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
Settings  
Deleting data  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
1. "CAR"  
Additional information:  
2. "Settings"  
Reset vehicle data, refer to page 63.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
66  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐  
ited period of time.  
Driver profiles  
As soon as the engine is started or any button is  
pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.  
Principle  
Driver profiles can be created to store personal  
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple  
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver  
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐  
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in  
the driver profile.  
Setup assistant  
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for  
a limited period of time on the Welcome screen  
to configure the most important settings for the  
vehicle.  
"Getting started" Select to start the set-up assis‐  
tant.  
General information  
Three personal driver profiles can be created.  
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive at  
any time.  
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be  
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active  
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐  
lected.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically  
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest  
profile.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Getting started"  
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐  
lowing functions:  
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver when  
it is unlocked. For this purpose, the recognition  
via a vehicle key or a digital key must be as‐  
signed to a driver profile.  
▷ Setting the system language.  
▷ ConnectedDrive countries:  
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored  
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with  
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is  
thereby possible to use these settings in other  
BMW vehicles as well.  
If the set-up assistant was opened in the  
guest profile: create driver profile.  
▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.  
▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an al‐  
ready defined driver profile: set up personal  
assistant.  
Functional requirements  
When a driver profile is created, switched or de‐  
leted, the vehicle must move at a maximum of  
walking speed.  
▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant  
was opened from an already defined driver  
profile or a guest profile: set up services or  
confirm the explanation for the transmission  
of vehicle related data.  
Welcome screen  
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐  
come screen will be displayed.  
▷ Set up other methods for use.  
The selected settings are stored in the active  
driver's profile.  
The following actions can be carried out on the  
Welcome screen:  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.  
Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest  
profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.  
▷ Switching the driver profile.  
▷ Starting the set-up assistant.  
67  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐  
matically active:  
Scanning the displayed QR code will accept  
the access data for the ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count from the BMW app.  
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet.  
▷ "Log in"  
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐  
hicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle.  
The access data must be entered via iDrive.  
▷ "New registration"  
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the  
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐  
cle.  
Scan the displayed QR code and follow the  
instructions on the smartphone.  
The following limitations apply:  
Selecting recognition  
1. "CAR"  
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to  
the guest profile.  
2. "Driver profiles"  
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest  
profile.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible  
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "with vehicle key"  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
The vehicle key that is recognized in the  
car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐  
file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected,  
the unintended vehicle keys must be re‐  
moved from the car’s interior.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
▷ "With Digital Key"  
3. "Guest"  
4. "OK"  
The digital key that is recognized in the  
car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐  
file. If multiple digital keys are detected,  
the unintended digital keys must be re‐  
moved from the car’s interior.  
Creating a driver profile  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
6. "Activate linkage"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As soon as the vehicle detects the vehicle key or  
the digital key, the corresponding driver profile  
will be activated. If the vehicle key or the smart‐  
phone with the digital key is not carried with you  
or not recognized, the driver profile can only be  
selected on the Welcome screen when a PIN has  
been set up.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Add driver profile"  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be  
entered for the driver profile.  
ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐  
tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver  
profile. The following options are available for this  
purpose:  
Setting up a PIN  
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐  
vated without vehicle key and without digital key.  
▷ "Via My BMW app"  
68  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
In this case, a PIN can be set up to activate the  
driver profile.  
The handed over vehicle key can then no longer  
be used to access the personal driver profile.  
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐  
ble: If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not  
known, the driver profile cannot be activated.  
Selecting a driver profile  
Depending on the recognition setting, the driver  
profile will be selected automatically.  
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If  
a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not known, the  
driver's profile can be activated with the access  
data of the corresponding ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count.  
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will  
be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive.  
A PIN may have to be entered.  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "OK"  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. "using PIN"  
All settings stored in the selected driver profile  
are automatically applied.  
Changing/canceling the  
recognition function  
When another vehicle key or another digital key  
is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐  
ment must be canceled first.  
Switching synchronization with  
the ConnectedDrive account  
on/off  
The settings stored in the driver's profile are  
synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive  
account. This means that it is possible to use the  
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with  
ConnectedDrive access as well, if this function is  
supported.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive  
account is enabled when a driver profile is cre‐  
ated or via iDrive:  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "with vehicle key"  
▷ "With Digital Key"  
6. "Activate linkage"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be handed  
over, such as for maintenance, carry out the fol‐  
lowing steps first:  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Synchronize driver profile"  
6. "Synchronize driver profile"  
▷ Setting up PIN.  
▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key.  
▷ Switching to the guest profile.  
69  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile  
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count will be retained.  
Renaming a driver profile  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
System limits  
A clear detection of the desired vehicle key may  
not be possible in the following cases, e.g.:  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "Settings"  
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort  
Access.  
5. Enter a profile name.  
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
6.  
Select the icon.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
▷ When multiple vehicle keys are located in the  
outer area on the driver's side of the vehicle.  
The name of the driver profile is transferred from  
the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for the  
profile name must be made in the Connected‐  
Drive account.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
A driver profile can only be created and  
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account  
when the vehicle has cellular network reception.  
Selecting a profile picture  
1. "CAR"  
The use of personal settings that are stored in  
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is  
subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐  
tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐  
able, or available in a non-compatible version, in  
other vehicles.  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Avatar"  
5. Select the desired profile picture.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
The profile image is transferred from the Con‐  
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.  
Deleting the driver profile  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Remove driver profile"  
6. Select the desired driver profile.  
7. "Delete now"  
70  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Connections  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle  
Principle  
General information  
Various connection types are available for using  
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection  
type to select depends on the mobile device and  
the desired function.  
The following overview shows possible functions  
and the suitable connection types for them. The  
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐  
vice.  
Function  
Connection type  
Symbol in the  
device list  
Making calls via the hands-free sys‐  
tem.  
Bluetooth.  
Using phone functions via iDrive or  
touchscreen.  
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or SMS.  
Playing music from the smartphone or Bluetooth audio.  
the audio player.  
WLAN in the vehicle:  
WLAN.  
WLAN.  
WLAN.  
Using apps in the vehicle.  
Wi-Fi hotspot:  
Using the vehicle Internet access.  
Screen Mirroring:  
Showing the smartphone display on  
the Control Display.  
USB port:  
USB.  
Playing music or videos from a USB  
device.  
71  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Connection type  
Symbol in the  
device list  
Apple CarPlay:  
Bluetooth and WLAN.  
Bluetooth and WLAN.  
Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐  
eration.  
Android Auto:  
Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐  
eration.  
The following connection types require one-time  
pairing with the vehicle:  
Displaying the vehicle identification  
number and software part number  
▷ Bluetooth.  
▷ WLAN.  
When looking for compatible devices, you may  
have to state the vehicle identification number  
and the software part number. These numbers  
can be displayed in the vehicle.  
Paired devices are automatically recognized later  
on and connected to the vehicle.  
1. "COM"  
Safety information  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control  
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐  
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the  
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
5. "Bluetooth® info"  
6. "System information"  
Managing mobile devices  
General information  
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐  
matically recognized and reconnected when  
standby state is switched on.  
Compatible devices  
General information  
Information on mobile devices compatible with  
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/  
bluetooth.  
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the  
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been  
detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐  
cle and can be used via iDrive.  
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐  
sary, for instance authorization; see the oper‐  
ating instructions of the device.  
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed  
or deviating software versions.  
Displaying the device list  
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐  
cle are displayed in the device list.  
72  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
A maximum of four devices can be connected to  
the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of ten  
devices can be connected to the vehicle via  
WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices will be de‐  
tected.  
functions may be deactivated on a device  
already connected.  
▷ "Disconnect device"  
The device remains paired and can be  
connected again.  
1. "COM"  
▷ "Delete device"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
The device is disconnected and removed  
from the device list.  
An icon to the right of the device name indicates,  
for which function the device is used.  
▷ "Connection mode"  
When the icon is displayed in white, this function  
is actively connected to the vehicle. The icon is  
displayed in gray when the function of the device  
is inactive.  
Select a connection mode, for instance  
Apple CarPlay.  
▷ "Telephone"  
Set telephone.  
Icon Meaning  
Telephone.  
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"  
Playback of music files on external devi‐  
ces such as audio devices or mobile  
phones via Bluetooth®.  
Bluetooth audio.  
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Apps.  
▷ "Apps"  
With the installed BMW app, apps from  
the smartphone can be displayed in the  
vehicle.  
Screen Mirroring.  
Apple CarPlay.  
▷ "Wi-Fi®"  
Connects the device with the WLAN in  
the vehicle.  
Android Auto.  
Configuring the device  
Functions can be activated or deactivated for  
paired and connected devices.  
Priority of the phones  
When multiple mobile phones are connected to  
the vehicle, you can specify the priority of the  
mobile phones for reconnection.  
The scope of functions depends on the mobile  
device.  
1. "COM"  
Follow the information on the Control Display.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
1. "COM"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Select the desired device.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Connect device"  
5. "Priorities for telephones"  
6. Select the desired device.  
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.  
The functions that were assigned to the  
device before disconnecting are assigned  
to the device when it is reconnected. The  
73  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Frequently Asked Questions  
Bluetooth connection  
All requirements are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐  
pected.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 72.  
In this case, the following explanations can help:  
▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in the  
vehicle.  
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or  
connected?  
▷ The device is ready for operation.  
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐  
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.  
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and  
on the device.  
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections  
with other devices.  
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the  
Control Display.  
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐  
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new  
device search.  
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may  
be required on the device; refer to the operat‐  
ing instructions of the device.  
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same  
function are paired.  
Activate Bluetooth  
1. "COM"  
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or  
has only a limited remaining battery life.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the  
power-save mode where required.  
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?  
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not  
function anymore.  
5. "Bluetooth®"  
6. Select setting.  
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.  
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for  
mobile phone operation.  
Connecting the device  
1. "COM"  
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme  
ambient temperatures.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
Why can telephone functions not be used via  
iDrive?  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
▷ Phone functions are not configured for the  
mobile phone.  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on  
the Control Display.  
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐  
phone function.  
6. Compare the control number displayed on  
the Control Display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐  
firm that the two match.  
Why are no or not all telephone book entries dis‐  
played or why are they incomplete?  
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.  
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle  
and displayed in the device list.  
74  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Connections  
CONTROLS  
▷ Transmission of the telephone book entries is  
not yet complete.  
WLAN connection  
▷ It is possible that only the telephone book en‐  
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are  
transmitted.  
General information  
For certain applications, such as apps, the data  
exchange between smartphone and vehicle oc‐  
curs via WLAN.  
▷ It may not be possible to display telephone  
book entries with special characters.  
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts  
from social networks.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
▷ The number of phone book entries to be  
transmitted is too high.  
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐  
terface.  
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐  
stance due to stored information such as  
memos.  
Activate WLAN in the vehicle  
1. "COM"  
Reduce the data volume of the contact.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as  
audio source or as telephone.  
Configure the mobile phone and connect it  
with the telephone function.  
5. "Wi-Fi®"  
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the  
phone after the last synchronization.  
Wi-Fi hotspot  
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload  
contacts"  
Principle  
Compatible devices with WLAN interface can  
use the Internet connection of the vehicle via the  
Wi-Fi hotspot.  
How can the telephone connection quality be  
improved?  
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on  
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile  
phone.  
General information  
Up to ten devices can be connected to the Wi-  
Fi hotspot simultaneously.  
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless  
charging tray.  
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐  
rately in the sound settings.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐  
terface.  
If all points in this list have been checked and the  
required function is still not available, contact  
Customer Relations, a dealer’s service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 72.  
▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.  
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.  
▷ Registration and data contract with a service  
provider where required.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
75  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Connections  
CONTROLS  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Connecting a device to the  
Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot  
5. "Internet connection"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Using the Internet for the first time via the Wi-  
Fi hotspot requires registration and possibly a  
data volume purchase from a service provider.  
Depending on the country version, data volume  
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐  
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.  
Screen Mirroring  
General information  
1. "COM"  
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)  
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
5. "Internet, apps"  
Functional requirements  
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐  
played on the Control Display.  
▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐  
ing interface.  
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐  
sary.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 72.  
▷ Screen Mirroring is activated on the smart‐  
phone.  
"Open settings"  
7. Activate Internet usage.  
"Internet connection"  
▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.  
Pairing a smartphone with  
Screen Mirroring  
1. "COM"  
8. Tilt the Controller to the left.  
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile de‐  
vice. Select network name on the device.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
10.Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐  
nect.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
The device is displayed in the device list.  
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the  
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can  
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐  
spot.  
5. "Screen Mirroring"  
The WLAN name of the vehicle is displayed  
on the Control Display.  
6. Search for WLAN devices in the surrounding  
area of the smartphone.  
All devices connected via the hotspot use this  
data volume.  
The WLAN name of the vehicle appears on  
the device display. Select the WLAN name of  
the vehicle.  
Deactivating Internet usage via  
the Wi-Fi hotspot  
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data  
volume is used up, for instance.  
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.  
The device is connected and displayed in the  
device list.  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
76  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Operation  
For more information, refer to the Integrated  
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐  
gation, Entertainment, Communication.  
Apple CarPlay©  
preparation  
Principle  
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible  
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control  
and iDrive.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
All requirements are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐  
pected.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with  
iOS 7.1 or later.  
In this case, the following explanations can help:  
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple  
CarPlay. When a new connection is set up, Car‐  
Play can no longer be selected.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 72.  
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.  
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device  
list.  
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice control are  
activated on the iPhone.  
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned  
from the list of stored connections under  
Bluetooth and under WLAN.  
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must  
be activated on the iPhone.  
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐  
phone integration.  
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.  
If the steps listed have been carried out and the  
required function is still not available: contact  
Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐  
cle.  
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
Android Auto© preparation  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
Principle  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
Android Auto allows the operation of certain  
functions of a compatible smartphone via voice  
control and iDrive.  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on  
the Control Display.  
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth  
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.  
General information  
The range of services offered depends on the  
country.  
A control number is displayed.  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the Control Display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐  
firm that the two match.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung  
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or an  
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"  
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐  
played in the device list.  
77  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Android smartphone with Android 11, regard‐  
less of the manufacturer.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
All requirements are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐  
pected.  
▷ Compatible devices, refer to page 72.  
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.  
▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the  
smartphone.  
In this case, the following explanations can help:  
The smartphone has already been paired with  
Android Auto. When a new connection is set up,  
Android Auto can no longer be selected.  
▷ The smartphone must support a 5 Ghz WiFi  
connection.  
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must  
be activated on the smartphone.  
▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the  
device list.  
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐  
cle.  
▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐  
cerned from the list of stored connections  
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.  
Pairing a smartphone with  
Android Auto  
▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device.  
If the steps listed have been carried out and the  
required function is still not available: contact  
Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
USB connection  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on  
the Control Display.  
General information  
The following mobile devices can be connected  
to the USB port:  
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth  
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.  
A control number is displayed.  
▷ Mobile phones.  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the Control Display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐  
firm that the two match.  
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.  
▷ USB storage devices.  
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and  
exFAT are the recommended formats.  
8. "Use Android Auto"  
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile  
device.  
A connected USB device will be supplied with  
charge current via the USB port if the device  
supports this. Follow the maximum charge cur‐  
rent of the USB port.  
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and  
displayed in the device list.  
The following uses are possible on USB ports  
with data transmission:  
Operation  
▷ Playing music files.  
For more information, refer to the Integrated  
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐  
gation, Entertainment, Communication.  
▷ Playing videos.  
Follow the following when connecting:  
78  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐  
tor into the USB port.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 295.  
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.  
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical  
damage.  
▷ Due to the large number of USB devices  
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐  
teed that every device is operable on the ve‐  
hicle.  
▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐  
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐  
peratures; refer to the operating instructions  
of the device.  
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐  
niques, proper playback of the media stored  
on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in  
all cases.  
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored  
data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐  
board socket, when it is connected to the  
USB port.  
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being  
used, settings may be required on the USB  
storage device, refer to the operating instruc‐  
tions of the device.  
Not compatible USB devices:  
▷ USB hard drives.  
▷ USB hubs.  
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.  
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.  
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.  
Functional requirement  
Compatible device with USB port.  
Additional information:  
Compatible devices, refer to page 72.  
Connecting the device  
Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter  
cable to a USB port.  
The USB device is displayed in the device list.  
79  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Bat‐  
teries or button cells can be swallowed and  
lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours,  
for example, due to internal burns or chemical  
burns. There is an injury hazard or danger to  
life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of  
reach for children. Immediately seek medical  
help if there is any suspicion that a battery or  
button cell has been swallowed or is located in  
any part of the body.  
Vehicle key  
Warning  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the scope  
of delivery includes two vehicle keys or one vehi‐  
cle key and the BMW display key.  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In  
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from  
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the  
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be  
opened from the outside.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery.  
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐  
sion, various settings can be configured for the  
button functions.  
Warning  
A driver profile with personal settings can be as‐  
signed to a vehicle key.  
For some country versions, unlocking from the  
inside is only possible with special knowledge.  
To provide information on maintenance recom‐  
mendations, the service data is stored in the ve‐  
hicle key.  
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐  
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐  
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock  
the vehicle from the outside when there are  
people in it.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key,  
take the vehicle key with you when exiting the  
vehicle.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
80  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked  
when the button is pressed for the first time.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the  
vehicle is being unlocked.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 174.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
Overview  
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and  
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on  
the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle  
access points.  
In addition, the following functions are executed:  
▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle  
key, this driver profile will be activated and the  
settings that are stored in it will be applied.  
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
1
2
Unlocking  
Locking  
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the  
button in the car's interior, they will not be  
folded out when unlocking.  
Stationary climate control through Remote  
Engine Startꢀꢁ283  
3
4
Opening the trunk lid  
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐  
tion is switched off.  
Panic mode, pathway lighting  
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be  
switched off.  
Unlocking  
After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle  
is ready for operation.  
General information  
The light functions may depend on the ambient  
brightness.  
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐  
ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐  
tings:  
Convenient opening  
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐  
cle key after unlocking.  
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun  
protection are opened, as long as the button on  
the vehicle key is pressed.  
81  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Locking  
With Comfort Access:  
convenient closing  
General information  
Safety information  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking using  
the vehicle key depends on the following set‐  
tings:  
Warning  
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with  
a light signal or a sound signal.  
With convenient closing, body parts can be  
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is clear  
during convenient closing.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior  
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard  
warning flashers are switched on.  
Closing  
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.  
Press and hold the button on the vehicle  
key in the area close to the vehicle after  
locking.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun  
protection are closed, as long as the button on  
the vehicle key is pressed.  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they  
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐  
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning  
flashers are switched on.  
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐  
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors  
from being unlocked using the lock buttons  
or the door openers.  
Switching on the interior and  
exterior lighting  
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be  
switched on.  
Press the button on the vehicle key with  
the vehicle locked.  
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks  
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be  
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.  
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐  
onds after locking.  
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Interior lights, refer to page 178.  
▷ Depending on the settings, parts of the exte‐  
rior lighting will be switched on.  
The light functions may depend on the ambient  
brightness.  
82  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Trunk lid  
Replacing the battery  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
NOTICE  
Improper batteries in the vehicle key can dam‐  
age the vehicle key. There is a risk of damage  
to property, among other potential damage. Al‐  
ways replace the discharged battery with a bat‐  
tery with the same voltage, the same size and  
the same specification.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try version, it is possible to specify whether the  
trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key  
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.  
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐  
tion P must be engaged to open the trunk lid  
with the vehicle key.  
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
Integrated key, refer to page 94.  
Safety information  
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐  
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the  
cover with a lever movement of the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
NOTICE  
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a  
pointed object and lift it out.  
Opening  
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the  
positive side facing up.  
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path‐  
way lighting feature.  
5. Press the cover closed.  
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key  
until the integrated key engages.  
Additional information:  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 174.  
83  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐  
er’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop or take  
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
them to a collection point.  
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the tray for wireless charging tray.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
Additional vehicle keys  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key.  
Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐  
ice center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Loss of vehicle keys  
Integrated key, refer to page 94.  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and replaced  
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Switching the drive-ready state on  
via emergency detection of the  
vehicle key  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver pro‐  
file, the connection to this vehicle key must be  
deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned  
to the driver profile.  
Malfunction  
General information  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐  
function under the following circumstances:  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐  
ers or other equipment with high transmitting  
power.  
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the  
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐  
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐  
ter.  
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐  
jects.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together with  
metal objects.  
2. If the vehicle key is detected:  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.  
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or  
other electronic devices in direct proximity to  
the vehicle key.  
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly  
change the position of the vehicle key and repeat  
the procedure.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity  
to other electronic devices.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐  
hicle key?  
84  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐  
ices of the BMW app include the ability to  
lock and unlock a vehicle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
This requires an active BMW Connected‐  
Drive contract and the BMW app must be in‐  
stalled on a smartphone.  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In  
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from  
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the  
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be  
opened from the outside.  
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
Warning  
BMW display key  
For some country versions, unlocking from the  
inside is only possible with special knowledge.  
General information  
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐  
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐  
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock  
the vehicle from the outside when there are  
people in it.  
Thescope of delivery of the BMW display key in‐  
cludes an additional mechanical key. If the dis‐  
play key is used, the mechanical key should be  
carried with you, for instance in the wallet. The  
mechanical key is used like the integrated key.  
The display key supports all functions of the  
standard vehicle key.  
Warning  
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐  
able:  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
▷ Display status of doors and windows.  
▷ Display status of the alarm system.  
▷ Display service information.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
▷ Call up range with available fuel.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-car  
heating.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
Without parked-car heating: operate pre-ven‐  
tilation.  
▷ Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine  
Start  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
▷ Remote Control Parking.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 94.  
85  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Display  
General information  
The display is divided into the upper status line,  
the information area, and the lower status line.  
Upper status line  
The upper status line displays the following infor‐  
mation:  
▷
/
Vehicle secured/vehicle unsecured.  
1
2
3
Opening the trunk lid  
▷ Set time in the vehicle.  
Unlocking  
▷
Charge state of the display key battery.  
Press and hold or press three times in quick  
succession: panic mode  
Information area  
Press briefly: pathway lighting  
Locking  
The information area can be used to access in‐  
formation and perform additional functions.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
If the information area contains more than one  
page, then page indicators are shown beneath  
the information.  
Park button  
Display  
Back  
A solid indicator denotes the current  
page.  
Turn the display on/off  
Micro-USB charging interface  
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change  
between the pages.  
Reception range  
The number of available display key functions  
depends on the distance from the vehicle.  
If further information is available on a page, tap  
the appropriate icon.  
To return to the original page:  
icon beneath the display.  
tap on the  
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐  
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐  
ble.  
Lower status line  
The lower status line indicates whether or not  
the display key is within reception range.  
▷ The status information can be called up in the  
extended reception range.  
▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐  
tion range.  
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐  
ing can be operated.  
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐  
ception range. It indicates when the last data  
transfer from the vehicle took place.  
Without parked-car heating: the pre-ventila‐  
tion can be operated.  
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle,  
you can display the last transmitted status in‐  
formation from the vehicle.  
Turning on/off  
The display will go out automatically after a brief  
period to conserve battery power.  
The icon is shown on the display if one of  
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception  
range.  
86  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Hiding the display on the display manually: press  
the button on the left side of the display key.  
Main menu  
Information/Function  
"Preconditioning  
setting"  
With parked-car heating:  
operate parked-car heat‐  
ing.  
To show the display:  
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐  
play key.  
Without parked-car heat‐  
ing: operate pre-ventila‐  
tion.  
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to  
top to unlock the screen lock.  
To turn off the display to increase the usable bat‐  
tery life:  
Stationary climate control  
through Remote Engine  
Start.  
1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.  
"R/C parking"  
Remote Control Parking.  
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of  
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.  
Display key battery  
3. "OK"  
To turn the display on:  
General information  
Follow the following information:  
Press the button on the left side of the display  
key.  
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery  
declines, the display is switched off automati‐  
cally. The battery must be recharged so that  
the display can be switched back on. The op‐  
erability of the standard buttons is retained  
until the battery is completely discharged.  
Operating concept  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are  
up to five main menus providing access to the  
sub-menus.  
Main menu  
Information/Function  
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours  
before using the display key for the first time  
or if the key has not been used for an ex‐  
tended period.  
"Security  
information"  
/
Door status.  
Alarm system status.  
▷ The display key can be used while it is being  
charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully  
discharged, it may take some time before the  
display key can be used again.  
After alarm triggering:  
date, time, and reason for  
triggering the alarm.  
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers  
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐  
teed that every charger will function properly.  
The charging time depends on the charger  
used.  
Window status.  
Glass sunroof status.  
"Vehicle  
information"  
Maintenance indicators of  
Condition Based Service  
CBS.  
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the  
charger and the display key.  
Status of the roadside  
parking lights.  
Charging in the wireless charging tray may  
heat up the tray and the display key.  
At higher temperatures, the charge current  
through the display key may be reduced, and  
"Mobility info"  
Range with available fuel.  
87  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
in isolated cases the charge process may be  
interrupted temporarily.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
3. Close the tray cover.  
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐  
less charging tray, make sure there are no  
objects between it and the wireless charging  
tray.  
LED displays  
Color Meaning  
Blue  
The display key is charging.  
Safety information  
The blue LED stays illuminated once  
the inserted display key is fully  
charged.  
Warning  
When charging a device that meets the Qi  
standard in the wireless charging tray, any  
metal objects located between the device and  
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage  
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,  
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal  
transmission, between the device and the tray  
may impair the card function. There is a risk of  
injury and risk of damage to property. When  
charging mobile devices, make sure there are  
no objects between the device and the tray.  
Orange The display key is not charging.  
Temperature on the display key pos‐  
sibly too high or foreign object in  
charging tray.  
Red  
The display key is not charging.  
Contact a dealer’s service center or  
another qualified service center or re‐  
pair shop.  
Malfunction  
Charging  
General information  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Via USB  
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may  
malfunction under the following circumstances:  
Connect the display key via the micro-USB  
charging interface to a USB port.  
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.  
In the center console  
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐  
ers or other equipment with high transmitting  
power.  
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐  
jects.  
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or  
other electronic devices in direct proximity.  
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
1. Open the tray cover.  
Do not transport the display key together with  
metal objects or electronic devices.  
2. Place the display key into the middle of the  
wireless charging tray in front of the cup hold‐  
ers.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the mechanical key.  
88  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Turning on drive readiness via  
emergency detection of the BMW  
display key  
Key Card  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
General information  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
Key Card may not be available.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The digi‐  
tal key must be activated via iDrive.  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the display key has not been detected.  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because the  
active Key Card can be used to start the vehicle.  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a service  
appointment.  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
1. Hold the display key with its rear against the  
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐  
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐  
ter.  
2. If the display key is detected:  
Safety information  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.  
If the display key is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the display key and repeat the  
procedure.  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In  
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from  
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the  
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be  
opened from the outside.  
Resetting the BMW display key  
If the charged display key cannot be turned on  
anymore or if the display does not respond to  
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.  
Press and hold the following buttons on the dis‐  
play key at the same time for at least 10 seconds  
until the display is switched off and then on  
again:  
Warning  
For some country versions, unlocking from the  
inside is only possible with special knowledge.  
▷
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐  
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐  
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock  
the vehicle from the outside when there are  
people in it.  
▷
89  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Activate Key Card  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
2. Place Key Card centered into the smart‐  
phone tray.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Display  
to activate the Key Card.  
Deactivate Key Card  
1. "CAR"  
Connection to the vehicle  
2. "Settings"  
The communication between the vehicle and the  
Key Card uses near field communication, NFC.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. Select Key Card.  
6. "Key active"  
Activating/deactivating Key Card  
in the vehicle  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
General information  
The Key Card must be located in the smart‐  
phone tray and a vehicle key must be located in  
the vehicle to activate the Key Card.  
Unlocking and locking the  
vehicle  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
deactivate the Key Card.  
When BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehi‐  
cle, a digital key can be used instead of the vehi‐  
cle key.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Hold activated Key Card directly and centered on  
the external door handle of the driver's door.  
90  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the pro‐  
cedure.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compatible  
smartphone or other compatible mobile termi‐  
nals, such as a Smartwatch.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by the  
smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app pro‐  
vides a check to determine if the smartphone  
and the vehicle are compatible.  
Starting the engine  
A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐  
signed to a digital key.  
Additional information:  
Driver profiles, refer to page 67.  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al‐  
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key  
Card with you. This ensures access to the vehi‐  
cle, even in the event of a smartphone failure. It  
is also useful to carry the vehicle key or the Key  
Card with you if the vehicle has to be handed  
over to another person. You can then hand over  
the vehicle key or the Key Card, instead of your  
smartphone. Always take the vehicle key with  
you to a service appointment.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place activated Key Card centered into the  
smartphone tray.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐  
gine.  
With wireless charging tray: After starting the en‐  
gine, take the Key Card out of the tray to make  
tray available for charging compatible smart‐  
phones.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle  
may be disrupted by objects between the sen‐  
sors and the Key Card, for instance a wallet.  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In  
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from  
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the  
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be  
opened from the outside.  
BMW Digital Key  
Principle  
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐  
locked and locked, as well as started, with a  
compatible smartphone.  
Warning  
For some country versions, unlocking from the  
inside is only possible with special knowledge.  
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐  
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐  
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock  
the vehicle from the outside when there are  
people in it.  
General information  
The availability of the BMW Digital Key depends  
on the equipment and national-market version.  
91  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be located in  
the vehicle to be enabled.  
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu in  
the BMW app or on the Control Display.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
The valid service period of the digital key may be  
limited. The expiration date of the validity can be  
checked in the BMW app.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
After a digital key has expired, it can still be used  
to move the vehicle until the vehicle is used with  
a different vehicle key or digital key.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
Sharing digital keys  
General information  
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys with  
other people. This option is available via the  
smartphone that is enabled as digital remote  
control key.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
Connection to the vehicle  
The communication between the vehicle and the  
smartphone uses near field communication,  
NFC.  
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond‐  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
Limiting the range of functions  
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone  
has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐  
mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐  
pends on the smartphone.  
Certain functions of the digital key can be limited  
before handing it over. For example, if the digital  
key is handed over to a novice driver, the switch-  
off of driving stability control system can be ex‐  
cluded. For more information, refer to the Con‐  
nectedDrive portal and the BMW app.  
Enable the digital remote control  
key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a digi‐  
tal remote control key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the vehi‐  
cle for this purpose.  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone model,  
an authentication may be required for security  
and safety reasons.  
An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote  
control key or another method may be used for  
The proof of authorization can be started via the  
BMW app or via the activation code in the corre‐  
sponding smartphone function, for instance the  
92  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
authentication. Follow the corresponding instruc‐  
tions on the smartphone or the Control Display.  
The digital remote control key must be enabled  
again to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
1. "CAR"  
Deleting a shared key  
General information  
Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone  
with the digital remote control key, the smart‐  
phone with a shared key or via iDrive.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. "Reset function"  
The deletion via the smartphone with the digital  
remote control key will not be performed until  
the vehicle is used with a key other than the key  
to be deleted.  
Unlocking and locking the  
vehicle  
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared  
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the list  
of enabled digital keys.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
Deletion via iDrive  
Hold the near field communication antenna of  
the smartphone directly and centered on the ex‐  
ternal door handle of the driver's door.  
To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an  
authorized vehicle key must be located in the ve‐  
hicle or the remote control key must be located  
in the smartphone tray.  
The position of the near field communication an‐  
tenna depends on the smartphone model.  
1. "CAR"  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors including the trunk lid  
are closed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. "Delete key"  
Starting the engine  
Reset the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au‐  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐  
cle.  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function, all  
digital keys including the digital remote control  
key will be deleted.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐  
locked, locked or started with a digital key.  
2. Place smartphone centered into the smart‐  
phone tray.  
93  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
Safety information  
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.  
4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐  
gine.  
Warning  
For some country versions, unlocking from the  
inside is only possible with special knowledge.  
Sale of the smartphone  
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐  
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐  
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock  
the vehicle from the outside when there are  
people in it.  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior to  
selling the smartphone. This ensures that that  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key  
function or remove the vehicle from the Connec‐  
tedDrive account of the current vehicle owner.  
NOTICE  
The door lock is permanently joined with the  
door. The door handle can be moved. When  
pulling the door handle with the integrated key  
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be  
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐  
erty, among other potential damage. Remove  
the integrated key before pulling the external  
door handle.  
When the vehicle is removed from the Connec‐  
tedDrive account, all digital keys for the vehicle  
will be deleted.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐  
function under the following circumstances:  
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors  
in the vehicle by a smartphone cover that is  
not suitable.  
Removing  
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and the  
smartphone cover.  
Integrated key  
General information  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
without the vehicle key using the integrated key.  
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key also fits the glove compartment.  
94  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Locking/unlocking via the door  
lock  
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with  
one hand.  
Alarm system  
The activated alarm system is triggered when  
the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐  
locked via the door lock.  
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐  
cle is locked with the integrated key.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
General information  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is  
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐  
tem and interior lights come on.  
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the  
back under the cover and push the cover out.  
Use the thumb for counter support to prevent  
the cover from falling out of the door handle.  
Overview  
3. Remove the cover.  
Buttons for the central locking system.  
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the  
integrated key.  
Locking  
Press the button with the front doors  
closed.  
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
Unlocking  
Press the button.  
The other doors must be unlocked or locked  
from the inside.  
95  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening  
Functional requirements  
▷
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
Pull the door opener above the armrest.  
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not  
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.  
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door  
to open the door. The other doors remain  
locked.  
Unlocking  
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on  
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks  
the door, the second time opens it. The other  
doors remain locked.  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via  
the Comfort Access depends on the following  
settings:  
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
Comfort Access  
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the  
vehicle is being unlocked.  
Principle  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket, is sufficient.  
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key  
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐  
rior.  
General information  
Comfort Access supports the following func‐  
tions:  
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.  
In addition, the following functions are executed:  
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the  
door handle.  
▷ Convenient closing.  
▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle  
key, this driver profile will be activated and the  
settings that are stored in it will be applied.  
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐  
cle.  
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the  
BMW Digital Key.  
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.  
▷ Opening trunk lid.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the  
button in the car's interior, they will not be  
folded out when unlocking.  
▷ Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-  
touch activation.  
96  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐  
Convenient closing  
Safety information  
tion is switched off.  
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be  
switched off.  
Warning  
Locking  
With convenient closing, body parts can be  
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is clear  
during convenient closing.  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the  
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐  
tings:  
Closing  
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with  
a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior  
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard  
warning flashers are switched on.  
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.  
Locking the vehicle  
Close the driver's door.  
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a  
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it  
there without grasping the door handle.  
In addition to locking, the windows and glass  
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.  
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they  
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐  
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning  
flashers are switched on.  
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a  
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.  
1 second without grasping the door handle.  
Opening the trunk lid  
General information  
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,  
locked doors will not be unlocked.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐  
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors  
from being unlocked using the lock buttons  
or the door openers.  
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be  
switched on.  
97  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Warning  
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐  
tion P must be engaged for touchless opening of  
the trunk lid.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the trunk  
lid may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐  
tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement  
is detected.  
NOTICE  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐  
cle.  
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
If you open the trunk lid with no-touch activation,  
locked doors will not be unlocked.  
Contactless opening and closing of the trunk lid  
must be activated in the settings.  
Opening  
Safety information  
Warning  
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may  
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐  
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your  
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do  
not touch the vehicle.  
Press the button on the outer side of the trunk  
lid.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
Opening and closing the trunk lid  
with no-touch activation  
Principle  
The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch acti‐  
vation using the vehicle key you are carrying.  
With automatic tailgate operation, it can also be  
closed with no-touch activation. Two sensors  
detect a forward-directed foot motion in the cen‐  
tral rear area and the trunk lid is opened or  
closed.  
NOTICE  
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
98  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐  
tion, and moving it one more time after that will  
re-open the trunk lid.  
Settings  
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate  
can be switched on or off.  
1. "CAR"  
System limits  
2. "Settings"  
The detection of the foot movement may be lim‐  
ited due to the following external conditions:  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Tailgate"  
▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.  
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.  
Performing the foot movement  
Movement in the range of the sensors may  
cause unintended opening or closing of the  
cargo area, for instance due to water running  
own when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy  
rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening or  
closing of the cargo area in such cases, keep the  
vehicle key at a sufficient distance from the rear  
of the vehicle.  
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐  
prox. one arm's length away from the rear  
end.  
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving  
direction and immediately pull it back. With  
this movement, the leg must pass through  
the ranges of both sensors.  
Touchless unlocking and locking  
of the vehicle  
Principle  
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐  
proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key.  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
Opening  
Perform the foot movement described earlier.  
General information  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized  
vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.  
Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning  
system flashes.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.  
With automatic tailgate: Moving your foot again  
will stop the opening motion, and moving it one  
more time after that will close the trunk lid.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
Closing  
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐  
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.  
The trunk lid can only be closed with no-touch  
activation if automatic tailgate operation is active.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone  
for an extended period of time without move‐  
ment, the vehicle will be locked automatically.  
Perform the foot movement described earlier.  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger  
seat during locking and the safety belt of the  
99  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt  
buckle during locking:  
Locking after Remote Control  
Parking  
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
In the following situations, lock the vehicle with  
the vehicle key:  
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
▷ After Remote Control Parking.  
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐  
locking/locking depends on the following set‐  
tings:  
▷ After the initial trip, after the vehicle was man‐  
euvered out of the parking space with Re‐  
mote Control Parking.  
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.  
▷ If the automatic locking is active.  
Malfunction  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐  
function under the following circumstances:  
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.  
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
For replacing the battery, refer to page 83.  
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐  
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐  
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐  
cle on the driver's side.  
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐  
ers or other equipment with high transmitting  
power.  
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐  
locked regardless of the side on which the  
driver approaches the vehicle.  
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐  
jects.  
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is  
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐  
nal.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together with  
metal objects.  
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or  
other electronic devices in direct proximity to  
the vehicle key.  
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the  
vehicle is being unlocked.  
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity  
to other electronic devices.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and  
locked.  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking  
request detection on the door handles.  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the  
vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or  
use the integrated key.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,  
the doors and trunk lid must be closed.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 94.  
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the  
doors and trunk lid must be closed.  
Trunk lid  
▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐  
ond vehicle key can be located in a radius of  
six meters around the vehicle.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, touchless unlocking/locking is  
not possible until after the vehicle has been  
driven.  
100  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
Without automatic tailgate  
operation: opening and closing  
try version, it is possible to specify whether the  
trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key  
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.  
Opening from the outside  
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐  
tion P must be engaged to open the trunk lid  
with the vehicle key.  
It may not be possible to open the trunk lid when  
the vehicle is in valet parking mode.  
Additional information:  
Valet parking mode, refer to page 103.  
Safety information  
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button  
on the outer side of the trunk lid.  
Warning  
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the outer  
side of the trunk lid.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the ve‐  
hicle key for approx. 1 second.  
When unlocking with the vehicle key, the  
doors may also be unlocked.  
NOTICE  
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
Open from inside  
Press the button in the storage compart‐  
ment of the driver's door.  
Closing  
Grasp the recess grips and pull the trunk lid  
down.  
With Comfort Access: With the driver’s  
door closed, press the button on the in‐  
101  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
side of the trunk lid to lock an unlocked vehicle  
before closing the trunk lid.  
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing again continues the opening mo‐  
tion.  
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐  
er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐  
ing motion.  
With automatic tailgate  
operation: opening and closing  
Opening  
Closing  
From the outside  
From the outside  
▷
Press the button on the inside of the  
trunk lid.  
With Comfort Access:  
▷
Press the button on the inside of the  
trunk lid.  
The vehicle will be locked after closing the  
trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed for  
this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐  
side of the vehicle in the area of the trunk lid.  
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button  
on the outer side of the trunk lid.  
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the outer  
side of the trunk lid.  
From the inside  
Pull and hold the button in the storage  
compartmenr of the driver's door.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the ve‐  
hicle key for approx. 1 second.  
The vehicle key must be located inside the vehi‐  
cle for this function.  
Depending on the setting, the doors may also  
be unlocked.  
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid is  
closed.  
From the inside  
Press the button in the storage compart‐  
Interruption of the closing procedure  
ment of the driver's door.  
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
Interruption of the opening procedure  
The opening operation is interrupted:  
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.  
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.  
▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of  
the trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the  
trunk lid.  
▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of  
the trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk  
lid.  
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the  
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk  
lid.  
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the  
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.  
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.  
Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐  
ing motion.  
102  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Malfunction  
Valet parking mode  
In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate  
the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow and  
smooth motion.  
Principle  
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is  
disabled. The operation via iDrive is no longer  
possible.  
Trunk emergency unlocking  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is  
handed over for valet parking.  
General information  
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to  
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal pro‐  
files cannot be changed. Personal data cannot  
be displayed.  
Additionally, the following actions are carried out:  
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The trunk lid unlocks.  
▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is  
deactivated.  
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.  
Soft-close automatic  
function  
▷ Depending on the vehicle, the trunk lid can  
be locked and disconnected from the central  
locking system.  
Safety information  
Functional requirements  
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed while operating the  
doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐  
ing opening and closing.  
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.  
▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned  
ConnectedDrive account.  
Accessing the menu for the valet  
parking mode  
Closing  
To close the doors, push lightly.  
Via the switch-off screen  
Closing occurs automatically.  
After switching off drive-ready state the switch-  
off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for  
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.  
Via the display bar at the upper edge  
of the Control Display  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Valet parking mode"  
103  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
Via the vehicle settings  
1. "CAR"  
4. "Activate now"  
2. "Settings"  
This PIN can be used once to deactivate the  
valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐  
file.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
Activating the valet parking  
mode  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
General information  
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐  
played on the Control Display.  
General information  
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN  
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet  
parking mode at a future time.  
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐  
pends on which driver profile is selected on the  
lock screen.  
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐  
pending on the active driver profile.  
Driver profile with PIN  
Driver profile with PIN  
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐  
file.  
Regardless of which driver activated the valet  
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet  
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.  
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.  
1. "Lock tailgate as well"  
1. Select driver profile.  
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.  
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode  
must be deactivated by entering the assigned  
ConnectedDrive access data.  
2. "Activate now"  
Driver profile without PIN  
Driver profile without PIN  
The valet parking mode was activated by another  
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a  
driver without a PIN has to enter the access data  
for his ConnectedDrive account.  
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.  
1. "PIN"  
2. Enter PIN.  
3. "Lock tailgate as well"  
4. "Activate linkage"  
5. "Activate now"  
1. Select driver profile.  
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐  
signed to the driver profile.  
Guest profile  
The guest profile is the active driver profile.  
A PIN must be entered.  
1. "PIN"  
2. Enter PIN.  
3. "Lock tailgate as well"  
104  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
Guest profile  
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐  
tion signals:  
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can  
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was  
activated in the guest profile.  
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"  
Unlocking is signaled by blinking twice,  
locking by blinking once.  
1. Select guest profile.  
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐  
vation.  
▷ With alarm system:  
"Sound when locking/unlocking"  
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking  
mode must be deactivated via a personal driver  
profile.  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
Settings  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
2. "Settings"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐  
ing are possible.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"  
These settings are stored for the driver profile  
currently used.  
Automatic unlocking  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Unlocking and locking  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. Select the desired setting:  
Doors  
1. "CAR"  
5.  
▷ "Unlock doors when in Park"  
▷ "Unlock at end of trip"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Key button settings"  
After drive-ready state is switched off by  
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked  
vehicle is automatically unlocked.  
4.  
Select the icon.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Driver's door only"  
Automatic locking  
1. "CAR"  
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks  
the entire vehicle.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Lock in a few minutes"  
▷ "All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
The vehicle locks automatically after a while if  
no door is opened after unlocking.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
105  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Trunk lid  
Establishing idle state after  
opening the front doors  
Trunk lid and doors  
1. "CAR"  
You can set up if only the trunk lid will be un‐  
locked or if the doors will also be unlocked when  
the trunk lid is unlocked  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Idle state, refer to page 39.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try version, this setting may not be offered.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Alarm system  
3. "Key button settings"  
General information  
4.  
Select the icon.  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
The text next to the icon indicates the current  
setting.  
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.  
▷ Movements in the car's interior.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Tailgate"  
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐  
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐  
ing the vehicle.  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
lid will be unlocked or opened.  
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"  
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
lid will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard  
Diagnosis.  
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐  
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-  
Diagnosis.  
▷ "Tailgate opens only when vehicle is  
unlocked."  
The vehicle must be unlocked before the  
trunk lid can be used with the vehicle key.  
The alarm system signals these changes visually  
and acoustically:  
▷ "Lock tailgate button"  
▷ Acoustic alarm:  
The operation of the trunk lid via the vehi‐  
cle key is disabled.  
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic  
alarm may be suppressed.  
Comfort Access  
▷ Visual alarm:  
By flashing of the hazard warning system and  
headlights, where required.  
Touchless locking and unlocking  
Contactless locking and unlocking can be  
switched on or off.  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
1. "CAR"  
Turning on/off  
2. "Settings"  
The alarm system is switched on or off as soon  
as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or  
unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Comfort access"  
106  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access  
points are secured.  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door is  
opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
When the still open access points are closed,  
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐  
sor will be switched on.  
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
Opening the trunk lid with the  
alarm system switched on  
The trunk lid can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐  
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no  
longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
An alarm has been triggered.  
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐  
tored again provided the doors are locked. The  
hazard warning system flashes once.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐  
self in a dangerous situation.  
The alarm system responds in situations such as  
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is  
towed.  
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
Interior motion sensor  
The windows and the glass sunroof must be  
closed for the system to function properly.  
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key  
three times in succession.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor  
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized  
action occurred.  
Indicator light on the interior  
mirror  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
▷ In automatic car washes.  
▷ In duplex garages.  
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at  
sea or on a trailer.  
▷ With animals in the vehicle.  
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐  
onds:  
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐  
ing.  
The alarm system is switched on.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐  
sor can be switched off in such situations.  
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,  
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are  
107  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor  
and interior motion sensor  
Safety information  
Press the button on the vehicle key within  
10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is  
locked.  
Warning  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the windows is clear  
during opening and closing.  
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐  
onds and then continues to flash.  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor  
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.  
Overview  
Ending the alarm  
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.  
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key  
and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐  
gency detection of the vehicle key.  
Malfunction, refer to page 84.  
▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐  
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐  
senger door handle completely.  
Power windows  
Safety switch  
Power windows  
General information  
The windows can be opened with the vehicle  
key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐  
fort Access.  
Functional requirements  
The windows can be operated under the follow‐  
ing conditions.  
With Comfort Access: The windows can be  
closed from the outside via Comfort Access.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
▷ Drive readiness is switched on.  
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.  
When a window is often opened in the same po‐  
sition, this task can be performed by the BMW  
Intelligent Personal Assistant. For instance when  
the same parking garage is frequently used.  
Opening  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
Additional information:  
▷ Vehicle key, refer to page 80.  
The window opens while the switch is being  
held.  
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 50.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐  
ance point.  
The window opens automatically. Pressing  
the switch again stops the motion.  
108  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The window closes with limited jam protec‐  
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific  
threshold, closing is interrupted.  
Closing  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window closes while the switch is being  
held.  
2.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold  
it there.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist‐  
ance point.  
The window closes without jam protection.  
The window closes automatically if the door  
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.  
Safety switch  
Principle  
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐  
dren, for instance from opening and closing the  
rear windows using the switches in the rear.  
Jam protection system  
Principle  
The jam protection prevents objects or body  
parts becoming jammed between the door frame  
and window while a window is being closed.  
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the  
safety function is switched off automatically.  
General information  
Turning on/off  
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐  
terrupted.  
Press the button.  
The LED lights up if the safety function  
is switched on.  
Safety information  
Rear window roller  
sunblind  
Warning  
Accessories on the windows such as antennas  
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐  
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of  
movement of the windows.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
Closing without the jam protection  
system  
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might  
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:  
When operating the roller sunblind, objects  
stored on the rear shelf may damage the roller  
sunblind. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the roller sunblind is  
clear during the operation.  
1.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
109  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Roller sunblinds, rear side  
windows  
Safety information  
Warning  
With closed roller sunblinds and open windows,  
the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐  
ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may  
be damaged and vehicle occupants may be  
harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open  
the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds  
are closed.  
Button for the roller sunblind.  
Operation  
Press the button to open the closed  
roller sunblind or to close the open roller  
sunblind.  
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook it  
onto the bracket.  
If the button is pressed again during the move‐  
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐  
site direction.  
Glass sunroof  
General information  
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐  
erated using the same switch.  
System limits  
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐  
blind after having activated it consecutively a  
number of times, the overheating protection  
mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a  
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐  
tem cool.  
The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐  
side with the vehicle key and also closed with  
Comfort Access.  
With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be  
closed from the outside via Comfort Access.  
The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low inte‐  
rior temperatures.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the glass  
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.  
110  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Opening/closing the glass  
sunroof and sun protection  
separately  
▷ Slide switch back to the resist‐  
ance point and hold.  
Holding down the switch  
opens the sun protection. If  
the sun protection is already  
fully open, the glass sunroof  
opens.  
Opening/closing the glass sun‐  
roof.  
▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point  
and hold.  
The glass sunroof closes while the switch is  
being held. If the glass sunroof is already  
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro‐  
tection closes.  
Functional requirements  
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be  
operated under the following conditions.  
▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance  
point.  
The sun protection opens automatically. If the  
sun protection is already fully open, the glass  
sunroof opens automatically.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
▷ Drive readiness is switched on.  
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point.  
Lifting/closing glass sunroof  
Push switch briefly upward.  
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the  
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted  
position, the sun protection closes automati‐  
cally.  
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts  
and the sun protection opens  
slightly.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
▷ The opened glass sunroof  
closes until it is in the tilted  
position. The sun protection  
does not move.  
Opening/closing the glass  
sunroof and sun protection  
together  
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.  
▷ Briefly press out the switch  
twice in succession toward  
the rear past the resistance  
point.  
The glass sunroof and sun  
protection are opening to‐  
gether.  
111  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Pressing the switch again  
stops the motion.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes‐  
sion toward the front past the resistance  
point.  
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam  
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐  
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
The glass sunroof and sun protection are  
closing together.  
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐  
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof  
closes without jam protection. Make sure that  
the closing path is clear.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Comfort position  
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐  
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not  
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐  
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to  
this comfort position.  
Closing from the lifted position  
without jam protection  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐  
lows:  
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐  
roof fully.  
Jam protection system  
Concept  
The jam protection prevents objects or body  
parts from becoming jammed between the roof  
and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐  
ing.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
Initializing after a power  
interruption  
General information  
If a resistance or blockage is detected while the  
glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is  
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open  
position, or it is stopped when closing from the  
tilted position.  
General information  
After a power interruption during the opening or  
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be  
operated to a limited extent. Initializing the sys‐  
tem can help in this case.  
Closing from the open position  
without jam protection  
The system can be initialized under the following  
conditions:  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐  
lows:  
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.  
▷ The vehicle will not be moved until the initiali‐  
zation is completed.  
▷ The drive-ready state is established.  
▷ The outside temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃.  
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes  
without jam protection.  
112  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Make sure that the closing path is clear.  
Initializing the system  
Press the switch up and hold it  
until the initialization is complete:  
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.  
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then  
closes again.  
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,  
then opens and closes again.  
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof  
and sun protection have opened then closed  
again.  
113  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Seats  
Safety information  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex‐  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle control  
could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only  
adjust the seat on the driver's side when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Warning  
Sitting safely  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the  
protective effect of the safety belt can no lon‐  
ger be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under  
the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to  
starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is  
in the most upright position as possible and do  
not adjust again while driving.  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat posi‐  
tion plays an important role. Follow the informa‐  
tion in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
▷ Seats, refer to page 114.  
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 117.  
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 119.  
▷ Airbags, refer to page 180.  
Warning  
There is a risk of jamming when moving the  
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐  
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐  
ment.  
Electrically adjustable seats  
General information  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for  
the driver profile currently used. When a driver  
profile is selected, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
114  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Height  
Overview  
Press switch up or down.  
Seat tilt  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Thigh support  
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt  
Upper backrest  
Backrest width  
Lumbar support  
Backrest tilt, head restraint  
Longitudinal direction  
Tilt switch up or down.  
Backrest tilt  
Press switch forward or backward.  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
115  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The curvature is shifted up/  
down.  
Thigh support  
Multifunctional seat  
Backrest width  
Principle  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral  
support when taking corners.  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting the  
side sections of the backrest.  
Push the switch in the front or back.  
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,  
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.  
Sport seat  
Adjusting  
▷ Press the front section of the  
button:  
The backrest width de‐  
creases.  
▷ Press the rear section of the  
button:  
The backrest width increases.  
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push  
the thigh support forward or back.  
Upper backrest  
Principle  
The upper backrest supports the back in the  
shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a re‐  
laxed seat position and reduces strain on the  
shoulder muscles.  
Lumbar support  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region  
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are  
supported for upright sitting position.  
Adjusting  
▷ Press the front/rear section of  
the button:  
The curvature is increased/  
decreased.  
▷ Press the upper/lower section  
of the button:  
116  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting  
Safety information  
Warning  
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of the  
safety belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not  
allow more than one person to wear a single  
safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed  
on an occupant's lap, but must be transported  
and secured in designated child restraint sys‐  
tems.  
▷ Press the front section of the button:  
The upper backrest is inclined forward.  
▷ Press the rear section of the button:  
The upper backrest is inclined backward.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Make sure that all occu‐  
pants are wearing safety belts correctly.  
Safety belts  
General information  
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐  
sure occupant safety. However, they can only  
unfold their protective effect when adjusted cor‐  
rectly.  
Always make sure that safety belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐  
tional safety device. The airbags do not replace  
safety belts.  
Warning  
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐  
tective effect of the middle safety belt is not  
guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,  
lock the wider rear seat backrest.  
All belt fastening points are designed to achieve  
the best possible protective effect of the safety  
belts with proper use of the safety belts and cor‐  
rect seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, refer to  
page 114.  
Warning  
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear  
seats are intended for the persons sitting on the  
left and right.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in  
the following situations:  
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is  
intended for the person sitting in the middle.  
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other  
way.  
▷ Seat belt tensioners or belt retractors  
were modified.  
117  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,  
safety belt buckles, seat belt tensioners, belt  
retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean.  
Have the safety belts checked after an accident  
at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Unbuckling the safety belt  
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.  
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.  
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up  
mechanism.  
Middle safety belt in the rear  
Buckling the safety belt  
Correct use of safety belts  
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to  
your body over your lap and shoulders.  
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The safety belt may not press on  
your stomach.  
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or  
fragile objects.  
▷ Avoid thick clothing.  
1. Pull the latch plate at the end of the belt out  
of the fixture on the rear shelf.  
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward  
around your upper body.  
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt  
lock, arrow 1.  
Buckling the safety belt  
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the seat  
belt buckle, arrow 2.  
The seat belt buckles must engage audibly.  
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt  
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
Unbuckling the safety belt  
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.  
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.  
3. Open the belt lock, arrow 2, with the buckle  
tongue, arrow 1.  
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and  
front passenger's belt straps are automatically  
tightened once after driving away.  
4. Guide the safety belt to the fixture on the rear  
shelf.  
118  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Safety belt reminder for driver's  
Icon  
Description  
seat and front passenger seat  
Green: the safety belt is buckled  
on the corresponding rear seat.  
General information  
The safety belt reminder is issued when the driv‐  
er's safety belt is not buckled.  
The safety belt reminder is also active when the  
front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob‐  
jects are on the front passenger seat.  
Red: the safety belt is not buck‐  
led on the corresponding rear  
seat.  
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a  
passenger unbuckles a safety belt during the trip.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Safety mode  
In critical driving situations, for instance during  
emergency braking, the front safety belts tighten  
automatically.  
The indicator light lights up and a signal  
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts  
are positioned correctly. The safety belt  
reminder can also be activated if objects are  
placed on the front passenger seat.  
If the driving situation passes without an accident  
occurring, the belt tension relaxes.  
Safety belt reminder for rear  
seats  
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,  
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐  
ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐  
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip.  
General information  
The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐  
vated each time the engine starts.  
Front head restraints  
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a  
passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐  
ing the trip.  
General information  
The current head restraint position can be stored  
using the memory function.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐  
minates after the engine is started.  
Safety information  
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐  
ment version and country variant.  
Warning  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐  
straints can cause injuries in the head and neck  
area. There is a risk of injury.  
119  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷ Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
Adjusting the height: power head  
restraint  
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐  
ports the back of the head at as close to  
eye level as possible.  
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
Warning  
Press switch up or down.  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Adjusting the distance: manual  
head restraints  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐  
tective effect in the head and neck area. There  
is a risk of injury.  
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐  
straint toward the rear.  
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the  
front.  
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
After setting the distance, make sure that the  
head restraint engages correctly.  
Active head restraint  
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain  
severity, the active head restraint automatically  
reduces the distance from the head.  
Adjusting the distance: power  
head restraints  
The head restraint is automatically repositioned  
when the upper backrest is adjusted.  
Have the active head restraint checked and if  
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it  
was exposed to an accident.  
120  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the side extensions  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐  
tective effect in the head and neck area. There  
is a risk of injury.  
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint  
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐  
ing position.  
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
Removing  
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Rear head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Folding down the center head  
restraint  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐  
straints can cause injuries in the head and neck  
area. There is a risk of injury.  
To improve the view to the rear, the center head  
restraint can be folded to the rear. Only push the  
head restraint down if no one will be sitting in the  
center seat.  
▷ Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐  
ports the back of the head at as close to  
eye level as possible.  
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and  
fold the head restraint backward.  
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the  
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the  
head restraint engages correctly.  
121  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the height  
Installing  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head  
restraint.  
After the installation, make sure that the head re‐  
straint engages correctly.  
Exterior mirrors  
General information  
The mirror on the front passenger side is more  
curved than the driver's side mirror.  
The height of the outer head restraints can be  
adjusted.  
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push  
the head restraint down.  
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile  
currently in use. When a driver profile is selected,  
the stored position is called up automatically.  
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.  
After setting the height, make sure that the head  
restraint engages correctly.  
The current exterior mirror position can be stored  
using the memory function.  
Safety information  
Removing  
With through-loading system:  
Warning  
The outer head restraints can be removed. Only  
remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting  
in the seat in question.  
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than  
they appear. The distance to the road users be‐  
hind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐  
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of  
accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic  
behind by looking over your shoulder.  
Overview  
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in question.  
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 306.  
2. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐  
ance.  
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head  
restraint out completely.  
1
2
3
Adjusting  
Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor  
Folding in and out  
122  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting electrically  
Automatic dimming feature  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐  
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐  
ror are used to control this.  
Press the button.  
The selected mirror moves along with the  
button movement.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Principle  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐  
ing obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Selecting a mirror  
To change over to the other mirror:  
Slide the switch.  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.  
Activating  
1.  
slide the switch to the driver's side  
mirror position.  
Folding in and out  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a risk  
of damage to property, among other potential  
damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by  
hand or with the button.  
Deactivating  
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side  
mirror position.  
Interior mirror  
Press the button.  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Photocells are used for control:  
▷ In the mirror glass.  
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.  
15 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
▷ In car washes.  
▷ On the rear of the mirror.  
▷ On narrow roads.  
Overview  
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐  
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as  
needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
123  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting  
Functional requirements  
▷ Keep the photocells clean.  
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐  
tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat  
position.  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can  
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.  
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the  
vehicle is stationary only.  
Steering wheel heating  
Overview  
Electric steering wheel  
adjustment  
General information  
The steering wheel adjustment is stored for the  
driver profile currently in use. When a driver pro‐  
file is selected, the position is accessed automat‐  
ically when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
Button for steering wheel heating  
The current steering wheel position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Turning on/off  
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,  
the steering wheel moves temporarily into the  
upper position.  
Press the button.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes  
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel  
heating turns on automatically if the function was  
turned on at the completion of the last trip.  
124  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Memory function  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐  
essary, retrieved using the memory function:  
▷ Seat position.  
▷ Exterior mirror position.  
▷ Steering wheel position.  
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
doors.  
General information  
Two memory locations with different settings  
can be set for each driver profile.  
Storing  
1. Set the desired position.  
The following settings are not stored:  
▷ Backrest width.  
2.  
Press the button. The writing on the  
button lights up.  
▷ Lumbar support.  
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is  
lit. A signal sounds.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Calling up settings  
Press the desired button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the  
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.  
The procedure stops when a switch for setting  
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐  
tons is pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the driv‐  
er's side is interrupted after a short time while  
driving.  
Warning  
There is a risk of jamming when moving the  
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐  
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐  
ment.  
Massage function  
Principle  
Depending on the program, the massage func‐  
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood  
circulation and can avoid fatigue.  
General information  
Eight different massage programs can be se‐  
lected:  
125  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷ Hip activation.  
Seat heating  
▷ Upper-body activation.  
▷ Whole body activation.  
▷ Back massage.  
Overview  
Front  
▷ Shoulder massage.  
▷ Lumbar massage.  
▷ Upper body training.  
▷ Whole-body exercise.  
Overview  
Seat heating  
Rear  
Massage function  
Turning on  
Press the button once for each intensity  
level.  
The maximum intensity level is reached when  
three LEDs are lit.  
Seat heating  
Turning off  
Turning on  
Press and hold the button until the  
LEDs turn off.  
Press the button once for each temper‐  
ature level.  
The maximum temperature is reached when  
three LEDs are lit.  
Adjusting the massage program  
1. "CAR"  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes  
after a stop, seat heating is switched on auto‐  
matically with the temperature selected last.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. "Seat massage"  
When ECO PRO is activated, the heating output  
is reduced.  
Additional information:  
6. Select the desired setting.  
126  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
ECO PRO, refer to page 316.  
Turning on  
Press the button once for each ventila‐  
tion level.  
Turning off  
Press and hold the button until the bar  
display on the climate control display  
goes out.  
The maximum temperature is reached when  
three LEDs are lit.  
The ventilation switches back by one level after a  
short time.  
Seat heating distribution  
The heating effect in the seat cushion and the  
seat backrest can be distributed in different  
ways.  
Turning off  
Press and hold the button, until the  
LEDs turn off.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. Select the desired menu item.  
5. Select desired seat.  
Climate control rules  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment, some heating and  
cooling functions can be automatically activated  
depending on the outside temperature.  
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat  
heating distribution.  
Active seat ventilation  
General information  
The outside temperature at which the functions  
are to be automatically activated can be set via  
iDrive.  
Principle  
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas  
provide a comfortable seat temperature.  
Activation is performed if the outside tempera‐  
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature  
in the first few minutes after drive-ready state  
has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐  
ried out after the settings have been changed.  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐  
lowing functions can be automatically activated:  
▷ Seat heating.  
▷ Steering wheel heating  
▷ Seat ventilation.  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes  
after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐  
cally with the levels that were last selected.  
Active seat ventilation  
Functional requirement  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
127  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. If necessary, "Automate habits"  
5. Select the desired function.  
6. Activate the desired rule.  
7. Set the level.  
128  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and  
Warning  
options  
A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐  
sons, especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave per‐  
sons, especially children, or animals unattended  
in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to be‐  
come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐  
ries when touching the hot components. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐  
straint system to direct sunlight or cover where  
necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint  
system cool down before transporting a child.  
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
Transport children in the rear  
seat  
General information  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter  
than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the  
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐  
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.  
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a  
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint  
system can no longer be used due to their age,  
weight, or size.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
129  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
Warning  
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on  
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐  
ble additional child restraint systems. The pro‐  
tective effect of safety gear, including safety  
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts  
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened  
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐  
stance in the event of an accident, braking or  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,  
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.  
General information  
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐  
ating and safety information of the child restraint  
system manufacturer when selecting, installing,  
and using child restraint systems.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint systems  
and their fastening systems which have been  
damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐  
ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐  
strained in the event of an accident, braking or  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life.  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
General information  
Before using a child restraint system on the front  
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and  
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐  
activated.  
Do not use child restraint systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident.  
If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐  
tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐  
dent, have these systems checked and re‐  
placed by the dealer's service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 183.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐  
ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting  
or improper installation of the child seat. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure  
that the child restraint system fits securely  
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the  
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐  
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats  
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.  
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐  
straints or remove them.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child  
in a child restraint system when the airbags are  
activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐  
vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF  
indicator light lights up.  
130  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
On the front passenger seat  
Child seat security  
Deactivating airbags  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child  
in a child restraint system when the airbags are  
activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐  
vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF  
indicator light lights up.  
The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐  
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐  
ten child restraint systems.  
Before installing a child restraint system in the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,  
knee and side airbags on the front passenger  
side are deactivated.  
Locking the safety belt  
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.  
Additional information:  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
safety belt.  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 183.  
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it  
tight against the child restraint system. The  
safety belt is disabled.  
Seat position and height  
After installing a child restraint system, move the  
front passenger seat as far back as it will go and,  
if possible, bring it up to the highest position.  
This seat position and height ensure the best  
possible position for the belt and offers optimal  
protection in the event of an accident.  
Unlocking the safety belt  
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐  
pletely.  
If the upper attachment point of the safety belt is  
located in front of the belt guide of the child seat,  
move the front passenger seat carefully forward  
until the best possible belt guide position is  
reached.  
LATCH child seat  
mountings  
Backrest width  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.  
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a  
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,  
open the backrest width completely. Do not  
change the backrest width again and do not call  
up a memory position.  
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐  
ating and safety information from the child re‐  
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐  
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing  
systems.  
131  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Position  
Mounts for the lower LATCH  
anchors  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is  
restrained by the internal harnesses.  
Seats equipped with lower  
mountings are marked with a  
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.  
Safety information  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
Warning  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower mountings of  
standard outer LATCH positions  
to fasten a child restraint system  
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐  
hicle safety belt instead for the  
middle seat.  
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are  
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of  
the LATCH child restraint fixing system is lim‐  
ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the lower mountings are se‐  
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐  
straint fixing system fits securely against the  
backrest.  
Before installing LATCH child  
restraint fixing systems  
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the  
child seat mountings.  
Warning  
The attachment points for child restraint sys‐  
tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching  
child restraint systems only. When other ob‐  
jects are mounted, the attachment points can  
be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Attach only child restraint  
systems at the corresponding attachment  
points.  
Assembly of LATCH child  
restraint fixing systems  
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐  
er's information.  
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐  
erly engaged.  
132  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Attachment points  
Child restraint systems  
with tether strap  
Safety information  
Warning  
Icon  
Meaning  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on the  
rear seat backrest, the rear shelf  
or the rear seat.  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐  
fect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the upper retaining strap does not run  
over sharp edges and is not twisted as it  
passes the upper anchor.  
Routing the retaining strap  
Warning  
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective  
effect of the child restraint system is limited or  
there is none. In certain situations, for instance  
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,  
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that  
the rear backrests are locked.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Driving direction  
Head restraint  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point  
Rear shelf  
Warning  
The attachment points for child restraint sys‐  
tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching  
child restraint systems only. When other ob‐  
jects are mounted, the attachment points can  
be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Attach only child restraint  
systems at the corresponding attachment  
points.  
Seat backrest  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining  
strap to the attachment point  
1. Open the attachment point cover.  
2. Raise the head restraint.  
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the  
supports or along both sides of the head re‐  
straint to the attachment point.  
For the middle seat, guide it over or along  
both sides of the head restraint to the attach‐  
ment point where applicable.  
133  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
4. Hook the hook of the retaining strap to the at‐  
tachment point.  
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.  
6. Lower and engage head restraints as  
needed.  
Locking the doors and  
windows in the rear  
General information  
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure  
the rear doors and windows, for instance when  
transporting children.  
Doors  
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.  
The door can now be opened from the outside  
only.  
Safety switch for the rear  
Press the button on the driver's door.  
This disables various functions so that they can‐  
not be operated from the rear.  
Additional information:  
Safety switch, refer to page 109.  
134  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Auto Start/Stop function  
Principle  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
The system switches off the engine during a  
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights.  
Drive-ready state remains switched on. The en‐  
gine starts automatically for driving off.  
Additional information:  
Coasting, refer to page 318.  
General information  
After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐  
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The  
function is activated from speeds of approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Start/Stop button  
Principle  
Depending on the selected driving mode, the  
system is automatically activated or deactivated.  
Pressing the Start/Stop button  
switches drive-ready state on or  
off.  
Engine stop  
Steptronic transmission: the  
drive-ready state is switched on  
when you depress the brake pedal while press‐  
ing the Start/Stop button.  
Functional requirements  
Steptronic transmission  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches  
the drive-ready state back off and standby state  
is switched back on.  
The engine is switched off automatically during a  
stop under the following conditions:  
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position  
D.  
Additional information:  
▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 40.  
▷ Standby state, refer to page 40.  
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the  
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by  
Automatic Hold.  
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐  
er's door is closed.  
Driving away  
1. Turn on drive readiness.  
2. Apply gear position.  
3. Release the parking brake.  
4. Drive away.  
Steptronic transmission: manual  
engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automatically  
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be  
switched off manually:  
135  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ Depress the brake pedal forcefully again from  
the current pedal position.  
▷ The outside temperature is high and auto‐  
matic climate control is running.  
▷ Engage selector lever position P.  
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or  
cooled to the required level.  
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the  
engine switches off.  
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation  
when the automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
Air conditioning system when the  
engine is switched off  
The air flow from the air conditioning system is  
reduced when the engine is switched off.  
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐  
perature.  
▷ Engine cooling is required.  
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐  
ing wheel is being turned.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.  
▷ At higher elevations.  
General information  
The display in the instrument  
cluster indicates that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for an  
automatic engine start.  
▷ Hood is unlocked.  
▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.  
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.  
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐  
tion in N or R.  
The display indicates that the  
conditions for an automatic en‐  
gine stop have not been met.  
▷ After driving in reverse.  
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.  
Starting the engine  
Functional requirements  
Steptronic transmission  
Total time with switched-off engine  
ECO PRO driving mode: depend‐  
ing on the vehicle equipment, the  
total time that the engine has  
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐  
ing preconditions:  
been switched off using the Auto  
Start/Stop function is displayed  
on an automatic engine stop.  
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.  
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on  
the accelerator pedal.  
The total time can be reset via the trip data.  
Additional information:  
ECO PRO, refer to page 316.  
Driving off  
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.  
Functional limitations  
The engine is not switched off automatically in  
the following situations:  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically, it will  
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐  
lowing conditions are met:  
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.  
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.  
136  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is open.  
▷ When a situation is detected in which the  
stopping time is expected to be very short,  
the engine is not switched off automatically.  
A message appears on the Control Display,  
depending on the situation.  
▷ Hood was unlocked.  
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length  
of time.  
▷ When a situation is detected in which the ve‐  
hicle needs to drive off immediately, the en‐  
gine is started automatically.  
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop  
button.  
The function may be restricted if the navigation  
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐  
ample.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐  
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
Activating/deactivating the  
system manually  
▷ In case of excessive warming of the interior  
when air conditioning is turned on.  
▷ In case of excessive cooling of the interior  
when the heating is turned on.  
Principle  
The engine is not automatically switched off.  
▷ In case of a risk of window condensation  
when the automatic climate control is turned  
on.  
The engine is started during an automatic engine  
stop.  
▷ In case of a steering operation.  
▷ Steptronic transmission:  
Without Mild-Hybrid technology: via  
button  
When changing from gear lever position D to  
N or R.  
▷ Steptronic transmission:  
When changing from gear lever position P to  
N, D, or R.  
▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat‐  
tery.  
▷ When starting an oil level measurement.  
Press the button.  
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:  
additional functions Auto Start/  
Stop  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety  
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The  
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to  
adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive  
manner.  
Steptronic transmission: via  
selector lever position  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated  
in selector lever position M/S.  
Via the Driving Dynamics Control  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated  
in SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics  
Control.  
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐  
tions:  
137  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:  
display  
Driving Dynamics Control  
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is  
deactivated.  
Principle  
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the  
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.  
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐  
tivated.  
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the  
situation using various driving modes.  
Switching off the vehicle during  
an automatic engine stop  
General information  
The following systems are affected, for instance:  
▷ Engine characteristics.  
General information  
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can  
be switched off permanently, for instance when  
leaving it.  
▷ Steptronic transmission.  
▷ Adaptive chassis.  
▷ Adaptive Drive.  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
▷ Active roll stabilization.  
▷ Adaptive M chassis.  
▷ Adaptive M Chassis Professional  
▷ Integral Active Steering.  
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.  
▷ Cruise control.  
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐  
matically.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.  
Automatic deactivation  
General information  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function  
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,  
for instance if no driver is detected.  
When the drive-ready state is switched on, the  
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se‐  
lected automatically, depending on the equip‐  
ment.  
Overview  
Malfunction  
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches  
off the engine automatically. A Check Control  
message is displayed. It is possible to continue  
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's  
service center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
138  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
SPORT  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Principle  
The selected driving mode is dis‐  
played in the instrument cluster.  
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting  
for more agility with an optimized suspension.  
Turning on  
Press the button repeatedly until  
SPORT is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Driving modes  
Button  
Driving  
mode  
Configuration  
SPORT INDIVIDUAL  
SPORT  
INDIVIDUAL  
Principle  
SPORT  
PLUS  
In the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode, individ‐  
ual settings can be adjusted to support driving  
dynamics properties.  
COMFORT  
ECO PRO  
ADAPTIVE  
INDIVIDUAL  
Configuration  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
When the drive-ready state is switched on, the  
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se‐  
lected automatically, depending on the equip‐  
ment.  
3. "Driving mode"  
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐  
tings:  
Driving modes in detail  
COMFORT  
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".  
SPORT PLUS  
Principle  
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced set‐  
ting between sporty and consumption optimized  
driving.  
Principle  
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic  
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted  
drive.  
Turning on  
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐  
FORT is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Turning on  
Press the button repeatedly until  
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster.  
139  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Switching on  
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐  
ECO PRO  
Concept  
played in the instrument cluster.  
In ECO PRO drive mode, consumption is opti‐  
mized.  
INDIVIDUAL configuration  
General information  
The last individual configuration is activated di‐  
rectly when the driving mode is called up again.  
Turning on  
Press the button repeatedly until ECO  
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐  
ter.  
Activating configuration of the drive  
mode  
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL  
Press the button for the desired drive mode sev‐  
eral times.  
Principle  
In the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode, indi‐  
vidual settings can be adjusted to support an  
economical driving style.  
Parking brake  
The engine control and comfort features, for in‐  
stance the climate control output, are adjusted.  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle  
from rolling when it is parked.  
Configuration  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Safety information  
3. "Driving mode"  
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard  
settings:  
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
ADAPTIVE  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
Principle  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
The ADAPTIVE driving mode is a balanced driv‐  
ing mode that automatically adapts to the driving  
situation and driving style.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road  
sections are considered.  
140  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
While driving  
Warning  
General information  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
To use as emergency brake while driving.  
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle  
brakes hard while the switch is being  
pulled.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and  
the brake lights illuminate.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle  
is stationary.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
With Emergency Stop Assistant  
Pull the switch briefly to activate the emer‐  
gency stop function.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 207.  
Releasing  
Releasing manually  
1. Turn on drive readiness.  
2.  
Steptronic transmission: press the  
switch while the brake is pressed or selector  
lever position P is set.  
Parking brake  
The LED and indicator light turn off.  
The parking brake is released.  
Setting  
With a stationary vehicle  
Automatic release  
Pull the switch.  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive away.  
The LED lights up.  
The LED and indicator light turn off.  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter illuminates red. The parking brake is  
set.  
141  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Steptronic transmission:  
Automatic Hold  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
Principle  
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati‐  
cally setting and releasing the brake, such as  
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it  
is stationary.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle  
from rolling back when driving off.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
General information  
Under the following conditions, the parking brake  
is automatically engaged:  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐  
ing and lock the vehicle.  
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.  
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle  
is stationary.  
NOTICE  
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill  
using the parking brake.  
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐  
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐  
cle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of  
damage to property, among other potential  
damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold prior to  
entering the car wash.  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
Overview  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
Automatic Hold  
142  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The LED goes out.  
Establishing operational readiness  
of Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive readiness.  
The indicator light goes out.  
2.  
Press the button.  
The LED lights up.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
press additionally on the brake pedal, when  
switching off.  
The indicator light lights up green.  
Automatic Hold is functional.  
After every vehicle restart, the last se‐  
lected setting is active.  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault, se‐  
cure the vehicle against rolling before exiting.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Operational readiness is established and the  
driver's door is closed.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐  
stance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehi‐  
cle.  
After the brake is applied, the vehicle is  
kept from rolling as soon as the indicator  
light illuminates green.  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a  
power interruption:  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
The brake is released automatically and the indi‐  
cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐  
nated.  
2.  
Pull the switch while stepping on the  
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set  
and then push.  
Activating the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is  
exited.  
This process may take a few seconds. Some  
mechanical sounds associated with this process  
are normal.  
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐  
nated as soon as the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
Turn signal  
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the  
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐  
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐  
vated.  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in  
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on  
the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Switching operational readiness off  
Press the button.  
143  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The high beams light up when the low beams  
are switched on.  
Blinking  
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.  
Window wiper system  
General information  
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as  
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them  
to become worn more quickly.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
Safety information  
Triple turn signal activation  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
Warning  
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the  
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐  
ers are folded in when switching on.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "One-touch turn signal"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Brief blinking  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it  
there for as long as you want the turn signal to  
flash.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the  
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐  
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a  
risk of damage to property, among other poten‐  
tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to  
switching the wipers on.  
High beams,  
headlight flasher  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
Turn on window wiper system  
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.  
144  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
Safety information  
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.  
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.  
NOTICE  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can  
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.  
There is a risk of damage to property, among  
other potential damage. Deactivate the rain  
sensor in vehicle washes.  
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
When the journey is interrupted with the window  
wiper system turned on: when the journey con‐  
tinues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
Activate rain sensor  
Turn off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
Press the lever up once from its 0 position, ar‐  
row 1.  
Wiping operation is started.  
Press the lever down.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it reaches  
the 0 position.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0  
position.  
Deactivate rain sensor  
Press the lever back into the 0 position.  
The lever automatically returns to its 0 posi‐  
tion when released.  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Rain sensor  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the time  
between wipes depending on the intensity of the  
rainfall.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly  
in front of the interior mirror.  
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of  
the rain sensor.  
145  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
Fold-away position of the wipers  
Principle  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded  
out from the windshield, which is important, for  
instance, when changing the wiper blades or for  
folding away under frosty conditions.  
Windshield washer system  
Safety information  
Warning  
Safety information  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at  
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There  
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐  
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use  
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the  
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐  
ers are folded in when switching on.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the  
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is  
a risk of damage to property, among other po‐  
tential damage. Do not use the washer system  
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the  
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐  
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a  
risk of damage to property, among other poten‐  
tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to  
switching the wipers on.  
Cleaning the windshield  
Pull the lever.  
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐  
shield and activates the wipers briefly.  
Windshield washer nozzles  
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically  
heated while standby state is switched on.  
146  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Folding out the wipers  
Safety information  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the  
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing, for instance with the parking brake.  
Selector lever positions  
Gear position D  
Selector lever position for normal driving. All  
gears for forward travel are activated automati‐  
cally.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the wind‐  
shield.  
R is reverse  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Neutral N  
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,  
for instance in vehicle washes in selector lever  
position N.  
Folding down the wipers  
Parking position P  
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐  
shield.  
General information  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the individ‐  
ual wheels in selector lever position P.  
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold  
the wiper lever down again.  
Wipers return to their resting position and are  
ready again for operation.  
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
P is engaged automatically  
Steptronic transmission  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐  
cally in situations such as the following:  
Principle  
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐  
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐  
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.  
147  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and  
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐  
gaged.  
1. Fasten driver's safety belt.  
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐  
lector lever lock.  
▷ After the standby state has been turned off  
when selector lever position N is engaged.  
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the  
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal  
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary  
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐  
gaged.  
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐  
tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle  
may begin to move. Also set parking brake.  
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐  
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The  
selector lever automatically returns to the  
center position when released.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 140.  
Engaging selector lever  
positions  
General information  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position, maintain pressure on the  
brake pedal until you are ready to start.  
Functional requirements  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to  
change from selector lever position P to another  
selector lever position.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
The selection lever position P cannot be  
changed until all technical requirements are met.  
Engaging selector lever position D,  
N, R  
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty  
operation:  
Press button P.  
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐  
tion R.  
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐  
sition P into another selector lever position.  
148  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
General information  
Sport program M/S  
Principle  
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without  
its own power for a short distance, for instance in  
a car wash, or be pushed.  
The shifting points and shifting times in the  
Sport program are designed for sportier han‐  
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up  
later and the shifting times are shorter.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
Activating the Sport program  
NOTICE  
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
There is a risk of damage to property, among  
other potential damage. Do not switch standby  
state off in car washes.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on  
the brake pedal.  
Press the selector lever to the left from selector  
lever position D.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 142.  
4. Depress the brake pedal.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument  
cluster, for instance S1.  
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐  
vated.  
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐  
lector lever position N.  
6. Switch off drive-ready state.  
Ending the Sport program  
Press the selector lever to the right.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐  
played.  
The vehicle can roll.  
Manual mode M/S  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐  
cally after approximately 35 minutes.  
Principle  
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to  
change the selector lever position.  
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
Kickdown  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving  
performance.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐  
ance point at the full throttle position.  
149  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Shift paddles  
Activating manual mode  
1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐  
tor lever position D, arrow 1.  
Principle  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow  
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both  
hands on the steering wheel.  
General information  
Shifting  
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and road  
speeds.  
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it  
backward, arrows 2.  
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is  
changed.  
Short-term manual mode  
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐  
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument  
cluster, for instance M1.  
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐  
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles  
for a certain amount of time, the transmission  
switches back to automatic mode.  
Shifting  
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐  
ward.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.  
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is  
displayed in the instrument cluster.  
The transmission continues shifting automati‐  
cally in certain situations, for instance when RPM  
limits are reached.  
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull  
the left shift paddle.  
Steptronic Sport transmission:  
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S  
manual mode  
Depending on the motorization: if driving mode  
SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans‐  
mission does not automatically upshift in M/  
S manual mode once the maximum speed is  
reached.  
Continuous manual mode  
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐  
dle switches into manual mode permanently.  
Steptronic Sport transmission  
With the appropriate transmission version, the  
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐  
neously activating kickdown and operating the  
left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-  
term manual mode.  
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐  
down.  
Additional information:  
SPORT, refer to page 139.  
Ending the manual mode  
Press the selector lever to the right.  
150  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Shifting  
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:  
engage selector lever position N  
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank the  
engine.  
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must  
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button  
pressed.  
3. With your free hand, press the button on the  
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector  
lever into selector lever position N and hold,  
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐  
played in the instrument cluster.  
▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.  
▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.  
▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:  
keep the left shift paddle pulled.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐  
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
The selector lever position is dis‐  
played, for example P.  
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.  
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
Additional information:  
General information  
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 378.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to  
maneuver vehicle from a hazardous area.  
With Mild-Hybrid technology:  
engage selector lever position N  
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the  
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling  
away.  
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button.  
In vehicles with Mild-Hybrid technology and cor‐  
responding vehicle battery, the action steps for  
unlocking the transmission vary.  
3. With your free hand, press the button on the  
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector  
lever into selector lever position N and hold,  
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle battery, refer to page 370.  
151  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Start with launch control  
1. Turn on drive readiness.  
2.  
Press the button.  
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument  
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF  
lights up.  
3. Engage selector lever position S.  
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on  
the brake.  
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.  
5. Release the brake.  
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle  
position, kickdown.  
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area  
and secure it against moving on its own.  
A destination flag is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster.  
Additional information:  
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 378.  
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait  
briefly until the engine speed is constant.  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
Launch Control  
Principle  
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the  
destination flag illuminates.  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry surround‐  
ing conditions.  
The vehicle accelerates.  
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the  
destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐  
tor pedal is not released.  
General information  
The use of Launch Control causes premature  
component wear since this function represents a  
very heavy load for the vehicle.  
Repeated use during a trip  
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐  
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes  
before Launch Control can be used again.  
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐  
ditions, when used again.  
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.  
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off  
with Launch Control.  
Additional information:  
After using Launch Control  
To increase driving stability, activate DSC Dy‐  
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.  
Breaking-in period, refer to page 310.  
Functional requirement  
Launch Control is available when the engine is at  
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐  
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at  
least 6 miles/10 km.  
System limits  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.  
152  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
4
5
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐  
tion Camera  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Tachometerꢀꢁ162  
Selection listsꢀꢁ168  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Widgetsꢀꢁ155  
Trip odometer, see Trip dataꢀꢁ168  
ECO PRO displaysꢀꢁ316  
Power gaugeꢀꢁ162  
Status, Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ138  
Transmission displayꢀꢁ147  
Engine temperatureꢀꢁ164  
Outside temperatureꢀꢁ164  
Check Controlꢀꢁ156  
6
7
8
9
Instrument cluster  
Speed Limit Assistantꢀꢁ230  
Speed Limit Infoꢀꢁ166  
Timeꢀꢁ61  
General information  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be  
possible to deactivate the display change in the  
instrument cluster via iDrive.  
Central display area  
Depending on the equipment and configuration,  
the following is displayed in the central display  
area of the instrument cluster:  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
Overview  
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,  
if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐  
view with route guidance information.  
▷ Displays showing service notifications.  
▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about the  
assist systems is displayed in an animated  
surrounding area of the vehicle.  
Some displays in the central display area can be  
configured individually.  
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐  
ment version and country variant.  
1
Fuel gaugeꢀꢁ162  
Rangeꢀꢁ164  
2
3
Speedometer  
Central display areaꢀꢁ153  
Navigation display  
153  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Driving mode view  
Principle  
Safety information  
Warning  
Depending on the equipment, if the driving mode  
view is activated, the displays in the instrument  
cluster will adapt to the respective driving mode  
when a program is changed via the Driving Dy‐  
namics Control.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
Settings  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
Permanent display  
1. "CAR"  
4. "Driving mode view"  
2. "Settings"  
Settings  
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can  
be configured individually.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. "Central display area"  
6. "Assisted Driving View"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
Temporary display  
1. "CAR"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
Assisted Driving View  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver  
Assistance is active"  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment, information about  
the driver assistance systems is displayed in an  
animated surrounding area of the vehicle when  
driver assistance is active.  
Display  
General information  
Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving  
View can be displayed permanently or tempora‐  
rily with active driving assistance in the instru‐  
ment cluster.  
Example: the indicator/warning lights for the Ac‐  
tive Cruise Control with Stop & Go function ACC  
154  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane  
change to the next lane. At the same time, the  
lane change to the next lane is shown with ani‐  
mation in the Assisted Driving View.  
Display  
System limits  
The system's detection capability is limited. The  
system may indicate something wrong.  
Only objects that are detected by the system are  
taken into account.  
Additional information:  
G-meter  
The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap‐  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction on  
the vehicle occupants while driving.  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Widgets  
Efficiency display  
Principle  
Information about driving style and consumption  
can be displayed in the form of a consumption  
display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for  
example.  
Principle  
Displays for specific functions can be displayed  
in the instrument cluster.  
The following displays can be selected:  
▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.  
▷ Torque and power.  
General information  
Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐  
ent information will be displayed:  
▷ G-Meter.  
▷ Trip data.  
▷ Efficiency display.  
Driving  
mode  
Display  
Selecting  
COMFORT  
SPORT  
Average consumption.  
Current consumption.  
Energy recovery.  
ECO PRO  
ECO PRO bonus range.  
Distance traveled in Coasting  
mode.  
Current consumption.  
Continue to press the button on the turn signal  
lever until the desired widget is selected.  
Average fuel consumption  
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐  
sumption when driving a specific route.  
155  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Current consumption  
Hiding Check Control messages  
The current consumption displays the current  
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐  
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-  
friendly manner.  
Energy recovery  
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the  
vehicle is converted into electric energy in coast‐  
ing overrun mode. The vehicle battery is partially  
charged and fuel consumption can be reduced.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
ECO PRO bonus range  
Continuous display  
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐  
sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐  
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range.  
Some Check Control messages are displayed  
continuously and are not cleared until the fault is  
eliminated. If several faults occur at once, the  
messages are displayed consecutively.  
Check Control  
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐  
onds. After this time, they are displayed again  
automatically.  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors functions in  
the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the moni‐  
tored systems.  
Temporary display  
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐  
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check  
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐  
played again later.  
General information  
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐  
bination of indicator or warning lights and text  
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐  
cable, in the Head-up Display.  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
1. "CAR"  
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a  
text message may appear on the Control Display.  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Check Control messages"  
4. Select the text message.  
Display  
Check Control  
At least one Check Control message is  
displayed or stored.  
156  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Text messages  
Red lights  
Text messages in combination with an icon in  
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control  
message and the meaning of the indicator/warn‐  
ing lights.  
Safety belt reminder  
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:  
safety belt on the driver or passenger  
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐  
minder can also be activated if objects are placed  
on the front passenger seat.  
Supplementary text messages  
Additional information, such as the reason for a  
fault or the required action, can be called up via  
Check Control.  
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned  
correctly.  
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐  
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.  
Safety belt reminder for rear seats  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐  
ther help can be selected.  
The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐  
responding rear seat.  
1. "CAR"  
The displays may vary depending on the  
equipment version and country variant.  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Check Control messages"  
4. Select the desired text message.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Airbag system  
Airbag system and seat belt tensioner  
may not be working.  
Messages after trip completion  
Have the vehicle checked immediately  
by a dealer's service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐  
played again after drive-ready state is switched  
off.  
Parking brake  
Indicator/warning lights  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Principle  
For releasing the parking brake, refer to  
page 141.  
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster  
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐  
cle and indicate when a fault is present in the  
monitored systems.  
Brake system  
Brake system impaired. Continue to drive  
moderately.  
General information  
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐  
ety of combinations and colors.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately  
by a dealer's service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐  
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready  
state is switched on.  
157  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Approach control warning with light  
braking function  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function  
The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐  
warning. Brake and increase distance.  
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic  
signal sounds: braking and evading.  
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic  
signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an  
evasive maneuver, if necessary.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐  
fer to page 222.  
Additional information:  
Approach control warning with light braking func‐  
tion, refer to page 185.  
Steering Assistant  
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic  
signal sounds: the system will be  
switched off.  
Intersection collision warning  
The indicator light is illuminated: risk of  
collision with crossing vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Indicator light is illuminated: risk of colli‐  
sion with vehicle without detectable driv‐  
ing direction or prewarning for vehicles  
that cross own driving direction.  
Drive power  
Reduced drive power due to an over‐  
heated drivetrain.  
Intervene yourself, for instance by braking.  
Additional information:  
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal  
sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross own  
driving direction.  
Power gauge, refer to page 162.  
Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐  
sary.  
Yellow lights  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant  
Intersection collision warning, refer to page 190.  
The indicator light lights up and an  
acoustic signal may sound: a system in‐  
terruption is imminent.  
Pedestrian Warning with City  
Collision Mitigation  
The indicator warning light flashes: lane marking  
driven over.  
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic  
signal sounds: imminent collision with a  
detected person or a cyclist.  
Additional information:  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Intervene immediately by braking or make an  
evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System ABS  
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation,  
refer to page 194.  
158  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The Brake Assistant function may not  
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the  
longer braking distance into account.  
Tire pressure monitor  
The indicator light illuminates: the Tire  
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire pres‐  
sure or a flat tire. Follow the information  
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐  
er's service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
in the Check Control message.  
The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated  
continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses  
cannot be detected.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control  
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with the  
same radio frequency: after leaving the area  
of the interference, the system automatically  
becomes active again.  
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls  
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle  
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify  
your driving style to the driving circumstances.  
▷ In the case of tires with special approval: the  
tire pressure monitor was unable to complete  
the reset. Reset the system again.  
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐  
tioned.  
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐  
er's service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is  
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop as needed.  
Additional information:  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 213.  
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a  
dealer’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is  
deactivated or DTC Dynamic  
Traction Control is activated  
Additional information:  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 341.  
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.  
Additional information:  
Steering system  
Steering system may not be working.  
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer  
to page 213.  
Have the system checked by a dealer's  
service center or another qualified serv‐  
ice center or repair shop.  
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to  
page 215.  
Emissions  
Flat Tire Monitor FTM  
▷ The warning light lights up:  
The FTM signals a tire pressure loss in a  
tire.  
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the  
vehicle checked as soon as possible.  
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.  
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.  
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐  
cumstances:  
Additional information:  
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring  
in the engine.  
Run-flat tires, refer to page 348.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐  
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious  
159  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐  
ously damage emission control components,  
in particular the catalytic converter.  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 196.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to  
page 368.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant is  
switched on.  
High beams are switched on and off au‐  
tomatically depending on the traffic situation.  
Green lights  
Additional information:  
Safety belt reminder for rear seats  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 176.  
The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐  
sponding rear seat.  
The displays may vary depending on the  
equipment version and country variant.  
Automatic Hold  
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle  
is automatically held in place when it is  
stationary.  
Turn signal  
Additional information:  
Turn signal switched on.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 142.  
Unusually rapid blinking of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has  
failed.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
Additional information:  
The indicator light lights up: the system  
is switched on.  
Turn signal, refer to page 143.  
The indicator light flashes: the set speed  
limit has been exceeded.  
Parking lights  
Additional information:  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 218.  
Parking lights/low beams, refer to  
page 174.  
Cruise control  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is active.  
Low beams  
Additional information:  
Low beams are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 220.  
Parking lights/low beams, refer to  
page 174.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function  
Lane departure warning  
The indicator light lights up: the system  
is activated. Warnings can be issued.  
160  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The indicator light lights up: the system  
is switched on.  
Lane change assistant, refer to page 238.  
Additional information:  
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐  
fer to page 222.  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is active.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 236.  
Depending on the equipment, indicator  
light illuminates together with the icon for  
a cruise control system: Speed Limit As‐  
sistant is active and detected speed limits can be  
applied manually for the displayed system.  
Blue lights  
High beams  
High beams are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Indicator light illuminates: the detected  
speed limit can be applied with the SET  
button. As soon as the speed limit has  
High beams, refer to page 144.  
been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Drive power  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 230.  
Reduced drive power due to a cold drive‐  
train.  
Steering Assistant  
Additional information:  
Power gauge, refer to page 162.  
Indicator light lights up: the system sup‐  
ports the driver in keeping the vehicle  
within the lane.  
Gray lights  
Additional information:  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is interrupted.  
Lane change assistant  
Indicator light flashes: the conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work or the sys‐  
tem has been deactivated.  
Gray line for lane marking on the appro‐  
priate side: system detected a lane  
change request. Lane change not cur‐  
rently possible.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐  
fer to page 222.  
Arrow symbol for lane change green: the  
system carries out a lane change.  
Steering Assistant  
Arrow symbol for lane change gray: lane  
change not possible; functional require‐  
ments not met.  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is ready.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
161  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is interrupted.  
Additional information:  
Tachometer  
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 236.  
General information  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In this  
range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the  
engine.  
White lights  
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is ready.  
Activating/deactivating  
1. "CAR"  
Additional information:  
2. "Settings"  
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 236.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. "Engine display"  
6. "Tachometer"  
Fuel gauge  
Principle  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.  
When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐  
tivated, the activated tachometer is only shown in  
the COMFORT or SPORT driving mode.  
General information  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.  
Additional information:  
Power gauge  
Refueling, refer to page 322.  
Principle  
The display indicates the drive power available as  
a percentage of its total power.  
Display  
An arrow next to the fuel pump  
symbol indicates the vehicle side  
on which the fuel filler flap is lo‐  
cated.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
The current range is displayed as  
numerical value.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. "Engine display"  
6. "Power meter"  
162  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
     
Displays  
CONTROLS  
When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐  
tivated, the activated power gauge is only shown  
in the COMFORT driving mode.  
Shift lights  
Principle  
The Shift lights in the instrument cluster indicate  
the maximum shift point at which the best possi‐  
ble acceleration can be achieved.  
Display  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐  
ket version, the Shift lights are active in the M  
manual mode of the Steptronic Sport transmis‐  
sion and with manual transmission.  
Functional requirement  
▷ Depending on the equipment, either driving  
program SPORT or SPORT PLUS is acti‐  
vated.  
Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐  
ergy recovered by coasting or when decelerat‐  
ing, CHARGE.  
Pointer in the area of arrow 2: output in percent,  
POWER.  
▷ Head-up display is switched off or the display  
of the Shift lights in the Head-up display is  
deactivated.  
Drive power  
The available drive power may be reduced due  
to certain factors, for instance a cold engine. De‐  
pending on the available drive power, the range  
for POWER is adjusted automatically.  
Turning on/turning off  
Steptronic Sport transmission:  
1. If applicable, select SPORT or SPORT PLUS  
driving mode.  
If needed, icons in the power gauge indicate a  
reduction of the drive power.  
Press Driving Dynamics Control.  
2. Activate the M manual mode of the transmis‐  
sion.  
Example  
symbol  
Description  
Reduced drive power due to a  
cold drivetrain.  
Display  
Reduced drive power due to an  
overheated drivetrain.  
Full Black Panel Display.  
163  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
dle or in the lower half of the  
temperature display.  
Information about the driving  
style  
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the  
tachometer.  
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of  
the temperature range. In addition, a Check  
Control message is displayed.  
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields  
indicate an increase in the speed.  
Additional information:  
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields  
indicate the upcoming shift moment.  
Coolant level, refer to page 365.  
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait  
any further to shift.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire  
display flashes red and the fuel supply is inter‐  
rupted in order to protect the engine.  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
Outside temperature  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
General information  
The lettering OFF in the instru‐  
ment cluster indicates that drive-  
ready state is switched off and  
standby state is switched on.  
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a  
signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
The letters READY in the instru‐  
ment cluster indicate that the  
drive readiness is turned on and  
the Auto Start/Stop function is  
ready to start the engine automat‐  
ically.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is  
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to  
the weather conditions at low temperatures.  
Additional information:  
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Engine oil temperature  
Range  
Display  
Principle  
The range indicates the distance that can still be  
covered with the current full tank of fuel.  
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at  
the low temperature end.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
▷ Normal operating tempera‐  
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐  
164  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
     
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Some information on service notifications can  
also be shown on the BMW display key.  
General information  
The estimated range available with the remaining  
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Display  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. With a sporty driv‐  
ing style, for instance fast cornering, the engine  
function is not always ensured.  
Detailed information on service  
notifications  
More information on the type of service required  
may be displayed on the Control Display.  
The Check Control message appears continu‐  
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
Safety information  
3.  
"Required services"  
Maintenance work and legally mandated in‐  
spections are displayed.  
NOTICE  
With a driving distance of less than  
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have  
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐  
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to  
property, among other potential damage. Re‐  
fuel promptly.  
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.  
Symbols  
Sym‐  
bols  
Description  
No service is currently required.  
Display  
The current range is displayed as  
numerical value next to the fuel  
gauge.  
The time for recommended mainte‐  
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐  
tion is approaching.  
Service interval is exceeded.  
Service notifications  
Entering appointment dates  
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐  
spections.  
Principle  
The function displays the service notifications  
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
General information  
1. "CAR"  
After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐  
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐  
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐  
nance.  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Required services"  
4. "Vehicle inspection"  
5. "Date:"  
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐  
ice notifications from your vehicle key.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
165  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐  
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐  
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.  
Gear shift indicator  
Principle  
The gear shift indicator recommends the most  
efficient gear for the current driving situation.  
With the navigation system, the system takes  
into account the information stored in the naviga‐  
tion data and also displays speed limits present  
on routes without signs.  
General information  
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐  
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic  
signs with speed limitations are detected and  
displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering  
or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐  
played. Speed limits with extra text characters  
are always displayed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the  
M manual mode of the Steptronic transmission  
and with manual transmission.  
Steptronic transmission:  
displaying  
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in  
the instrument cluster.  
Safety information  
Warning  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐  
gaged gear is displayed.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Example  
Description  
Efficient gear is set.  
Shift into efficient gear.  
Overview  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
Speed Limit Info  
Speed Limit Info  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
Additional information:  
Principle  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed  
limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,  
the Head-up Display.  
Displaying Speed Limit Info  
General information  
General information  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed  
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐  
ment cluster or via iDrive.  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐  
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well  
as overhead sign posts.  
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
166  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
where applicable, the Head-up Display  
when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐  
ceeded. The warning that is issued when  
a speed limit is exceeded may depend on  
the Speed Limit Assistant settings.  
Activating  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. "Speed limits"  
7. "Show current limit"  
▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit  
that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is  
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐  
eter in the instrument cluster.  
System limits  
Display  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Info  
Current speed limit.  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Without a navigation system the  
traffic signals are grayed out after  
curves or longer stretches of  
roadway.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional and may  
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐  
uations:  
Depending on the equipment,  
Speed Limit Info not available.  
▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐  
cealed by objects, stickers or paint.  
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front  
of you.  
▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,  
outdated or not available.  
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐  
tem.  
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such  
as due to changes in road layout.  
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,  
the indicator light will flash.  
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.  
Settings  
1. "CAR"  
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
▷ When the traffic signs do not correspond to  
the standard.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel  
road are detected.  
▷ In the presence of country-specific road signs  
or road layouts.  
▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐  
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info  
display in the instrument cluster and,  
167  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Button  
Function  
Selection lists  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
Concept  
Pressing the button again will  
close the currently displayed  
list.  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for  
certain functions in the instrument cluster or the  
Head-up Display.  
▷ Entertainment source.  
Show list of most recent tele‐  
phone calls.  
▷ Current audio source.  
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.  
Turn the thumbwheel to select  
the desired setting.  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the Control Display.  
Press the thumbwheel to con‐  
firm the setting.  
Display  
The list of the current entertain‐  
ment source can be displayed  
in the instrument cluster again  
by turning the thumbwheel.  
Trip data  
Principle  
Values for the trip, such as the average con‐  
sumption or trip kilometers, are displayed.  
Depending on the equipment version, the list in  
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐  
tration.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the Control  
Display and in the instrument cluster.  
Displaying and using the list  
The lists can be displayed and operated using  
the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐  
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling.  
Display on the Control Display  
Overview  
The following information is displayed depending  
on the equipment and the set interval and driving  
mode:  
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
▷ Average fuel consumption depending on the  
configured interval.  
▷ Average speed.  
168  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the  
Auto Start/Stop function.  
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐  
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐  
hicle has come to a standstill.  
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.  
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.  
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐  
cally reset after refueling with a larger  
quantity of fuel.  
Displays  
1. "CAR"  
▷ "Factory":  
Average consumption  
since delivery from the factory.  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
The values since the time of the factory  
delivery are displayed.  
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last  
manual reset are displayed. The values  
can be reset at any time.  
Consumption history  
The average consumption is shown in the con‐  
sumption history in form of a chart based on the  
distance traveled and the driving mode.  
Resetting average values  
manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time: "Individual ( )".  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment, information about  
the route can be displayed as widget in the in‐  
strument cluster.  
With the button on the turn signal lever:  
The following information is displayed:  
▷ Total kilometers.  
1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐  
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is  
selected.  
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config‐  
ured interval.  
▷ Average speed.  
Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument  
cluster.  
Additional information:  
Widgets, refer to page 155.  
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal  
lever.  
Adjusting the display of the trip  
data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data in the  
instrument cluster and on the Control Display are  
adjustable.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
4. "Data since"  
5. "Reset individual"  
4. "Data since"  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
5. Select the desired setting:  
169  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
been reset, the following interval is automatically  
set: "Individual ( )".  
Going to the vehicle status  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
Sport displays  
Information at a glance  
Concept  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Symbols  
Description  
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the  
run-flat tires, refer to page 348.  
Display on the Control Display  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐  
fer to page 341.  
Overview  
The following information is displayed:  
▷ Boost pressure.  
▷ Engine oil temperature.  
▷ G-Meter.  
"Engine oil level": electronic oil  
measurement, refer to  
page 362.  
"Check Control messages": dis‐  
playing stored Check Control  
messages, refer to page 156.  
▷ Torque.  
▷ Power.  
"Required services": displaying  
service notifications, refer to  
page 165.  
Displays  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Sport displays"  
Head-up Display  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of  
widgets in the instrument cluster.  
Principle  
The Head-up display projects important informa‐  
tion in the driver's field of view, for instance the  
speed.  
The following widgets can be selected:  
▷ Widget for torque and power.  
▷ Widget for G meter.  
The driver can get information without averting  
his or her eyes from the road.  
Additional information:  
General information  
Widgets, refer to page 155.  
Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up  
Display.  
Vehicle status  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per‐  
formed for several systems.  
170  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Setting the brightness  
Overview  
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the  
ambient brightness.  
The base setting can be adjusted manually.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Brightness"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐  
ness is set.  
Turning on/off  
1. "CAR"  
7. Press the Controller.  
2. "Settings"  
When the low beams are switched on, the  
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐  
justed using the instrument lighting.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
Adjusting the height  
1. "CAR"  
Display  
2. "Settings"  
Overview  
3. "Displays"  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up Display:  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Height"  
▷ Vehicle speed.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is  
reached.  
▷ Navigation instructions.  
▷ Check Control messages.  
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.  
▷ Driver assistance systems.  
▷ Sport displays.  
7. Press the Controller.  
The height of the Head-up Display can also be  
stored using the memory function.  
Setting the rotation  
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.  
Some of this information is only displayed briefly  
as needed.  
1. "CAR"  
Selecting displays in the Head-up  
Display  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Rotation"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is  
selected.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
7. Press the Controller.  
171  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to  
display a precise image.  
Additional settings  
1. "CAR"  
A film in the windshield prevents double images  
from being generated.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have  
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s  
service center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop, if necessary.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the set‐  
tings for the speed assistant.  
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the  
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.  
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and  
shift Lights in the Head-up Display.  
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐  
played in the Head-up Display.  
▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays  
are only displayed in SPORT driving  
mode.  
▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐  
tinuously displayed in the Head-up  
Display.  
▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐  
tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐  
formation can be displayed in the lower  
section of the Head-up Display.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐  
play is influenced by the following factors:  
▷ Seat position.  
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.  
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
▷ Wet road.  
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.  
If the image is distorted, have the base settings  
checked by a dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
172  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Lights  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Low beams.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Instrument lighting.  
Right roadside parking light.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Lights and lighting  
Automatic headlight  
control  
Switches in the vehicle  
Principle  
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐  
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for  
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐  
cipitation.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
The light switch element is located next to the  
steering wheel.  
Activating  
Switch position:  
Icon  
Function  
Lights off.  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐  
luminated when the low beams are switched on.  
Daytime driving lights.  
Parking lights.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot replace  
your personal judgment of lighting conditions.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Adaptive light functions.  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn the  
lights on manually.  
173  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Parking lights, low beams  
and roadside parking lights  
Welcome lights  
Principle  
The exterior lighting is switched on automatically  
when approaching or unlocking the vehicle.  
General information  
Position of switch:  
,
,
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is  
automatically switched off after a period of time.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐  
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.  
Parking lights  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
Switching on  
1. "CAR"  
Position of switch:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter lights up.  
4. Depending on the equipment, select the fol‐  
lowing setting:  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐  
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and  
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-  
ready state.  
▷ "Welcome and goodbye"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
light functions are switched on for a lim‐  
ited time.  
▷ "Door handle lights"  
Low beams  
Door handles and the ground in front of  
the doors are illuminated for a limited  
time.  
Switching on  
Position of switch:  
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state  
is switched on.  
Pathway lighting  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter lights up.  
Principle  
For the illumination of the vehicle’s surroundings  
after exiting the vehicle, the exterior lighting can  
be switched on for a defined period of time.  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside  
parking light can be switched on.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly  
push the turn signal lever forward.  
Button Function  
Right roadside parking light on/off.  
Left roadside parking light on/off.  
174  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Setting the duration  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
The adaptive light functions may consist of one  
system or multiple systems, depending on the  
equipment version:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Pathway lighting"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
6. "OK"  
▷ Adaptive Light Control.  
▷ Cornering light.  
Activating  
Switch position:  
The adaptive light functions are active when the  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Daytime driving lights  
General information  
Switch position:  
Adaptive Light Control  
▷
,
▷ Depending on the national-market version:  
General information  
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐  
rameters, the laser high beams follow the course  
of the road.  
The daytime driving lights light up when drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
Depending on the national-market version: after  
switching off the drive-ready state, the parking  
Cornering light  
lights will illuminate in position  
.
Activate/deactivate daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
Principle  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering  
light is switched on that lights up the inside of  
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a  
certain speed.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched on  
depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐  
cable, the use of turn signals.  
4. Depending on country specifications:  
"Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving  
lights, rear"  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may  
be automatically switched on regardless of the  
steering angle.  
Adaptive light functions  
Principle  
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐  
tion of the road.  
175  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter is illuminated when the low beams are  
switched on.  
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐  
ances out acceleration and braking processes as  
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to  
avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
The headlights are automatically switched be‐  
tween low beams and high beams.  
The blue indicator light in the instrument  
cluster lights up when the system  
switches on the high beams.  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti‐  
vated when manually switching the high beams  
on and off.  
Principle  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high beams on or off depending on  
the traffic situation.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis‐  
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Deactivate Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
General information  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high beams are switched on, whenever  
the traffic situation allows. In the low speed  
range, the high beams are not switched on by  
the system.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐  
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.  
The high beams can be switched on and off  
manually at any time.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
Activate Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐  
sistant can be adjusted.  
Switch position:  
176  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
wagons; when driving close to train or ship  
traffic; or at animal crossings.  
Safety information  
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming  
traffic on highways.  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐  
ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be  
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.  
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐  
tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐  
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior  
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with  
stickers, etc.  
Switch off the high beams manually if required.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Setting at standstill only.  
▷ Drive readiness is switched on.  
▷ Light is turned off.  
Laser high beams  
Principle  
The headlight range of the high beams is in‐  
creased and provides better illumination of the  
road.  
Increase sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for approxi‐  
mately 10 seconds.  
General information  
When the high beams are switched-on, starting  
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐  
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically  
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.  
A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐  
tem responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐  
mation can be obtained from the laser label on  
the headlight.  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again for  
approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready  
state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐  
sistant is reset to the factory settings.  
Safety information  
System limits  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot re‐  
place the driver's personal judgment of when to  
use the high beams. In situation that require this,  
therefore dimming manually.  
The system is not fully functional in the following  
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐  
sary:  
The label is in the headlight and is visible from  
the outside.  
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such  
as fog or heavy precipitation.  
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as  
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and  
177  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Lights  
CONTROLS  
To switch off permanently: press the button and  
hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
Instrument lighting  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can  
be switched on and off independently. The but‐  
ton is located in the rear headliner.  
Functional requirement  
The parking lights or low beams must be  
switched on to set the brightness.  
Turning reading lights on/off  
Setting the brightness  
Press the button.  
Adjust the brightness with the  
thumbwheel.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐  
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in  
the front and rear.  
Ambient light  
Interior lighting  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐  
rior.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐  
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐  
trolled.  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
1. "CAR"  
Overview  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Ambient lighting"  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐  
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐  
cle is locked.  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it  
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐  
locked.  
Interior lights  
Reading lights  
Selecting the color  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Turning interior lights on/off  
3. "Interior lighting"  
Press the button.  
178  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
     
Lights  
CONTROLS  
4. "Color"  
Turning speaker lighting on/off  
The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐  
hicle is locked.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the brightness  
1. "CAR"  
Setting the brightness  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Brightness"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"  
5. "Brightness"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Dimmed while driving  
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Dimmed for night driving"  
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond  
Surround Sound System  
Principle  
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.  
Brightness can be individually set.  
General information  
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be  
switched off.  
Activating/deactivating speaker  
lighting  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"  
179  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
Airbags  
1
2
3
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
Front airbags help protect the driver and the  
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts  
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐  
equate protection.  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest and lap  
area.  
180  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
hands and the upper body is as far back as  
possible while still maintaining a comfortable  
grip on the steering wheel.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag  
protects the head.  
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting  
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in  
the floor area and does not support them on  
the dashboard.  
Ejection Mitigation  
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐  
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the  
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants  
through side windows during rollovers or side  
collision events.  
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐  
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐  
son.  
Knee airbag  
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐  
senger side must stay clear - do not attach  
adhesive film or coverings and do not attach  
brackets or cables, for instance for navigation  
devices or mobile phones.  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of  
a frontal impact.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐  
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with ad‐  
hesive, do not cover them or modify them in  
any way.  
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the front passenger side as a storage area.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or  
other objects to the front passenger seat that  
are not specifically suited for seats with  
integrated side airbags.  
Warning  
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag  
system cannot provide protection as intended  
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐  
gering. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Follow the information on achieving the opti‐  
mum protective effect of the airbag system.  
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐  
ets, over the backrests.  
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐  
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This  
also applies to steering wheel covers, the  
dashboard, and the seats.  
▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐  
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as  
possible when the airbag is triggered.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to  
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐  
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands  
can be crossed over the steering wheel. Se‐  
lect the settings so that the shoulder rests  
against the backrest when crossing the  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐  
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW  
Customer Relations for further information.  
181  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warnings and information on the airbags are also  
found on the sun visors.  
Strength of the driver's and front  
passenger airbag  
Operational readiness of the  
airbag system  
General information  
The power that triggers the driver's/front passen‐  
ger airbags depends on the position of the driv‐  
er's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
To maintain the accuracy of this function over  
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as  
a respective message appears on the Control  
Display.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐  
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐  
jury. Do not touch individual components.  
Calibrating the front seats  
Warning  
Warning  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the  
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the  
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐  
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐  
jury or danger to life. Have the airbag system  
checked, repaired, disassembled and scrapped  
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
There is a risk of jamming when moving the  
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐  
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐  
ment.  
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐  
trol Display.  
1. Press the switch and move the respective  
seat all the way forward, until it stops.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still  
moves forward slightly.  
When drive-ready state is turned on, the  
warning light in the instrument cluster  
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the  
operational readiness of the entire airbag system  
and the seat belt tensioners.  
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.  
The calibration procedure is completed when the  
message on the Control Display disappears.  
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat  
the calibration.  
Malfunction  
If the message does not disappear after a repeat  
calibration, have the system checked as soon as  
possible.  
▷ Warning light does not come on  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
▷ The warning light lights up continu‐  
ously.  
Have the system checked.  
182  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or  
other items to the front passenger seat un‐  
less they are specifically determined to be  
safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
Automatic deactivation of  
the front passenger airbags  
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the  
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐  
tem is to be installed on it.  
Principle  
The system reads if the front passenger seat is  
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐  
ance.  
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can  
press against the seat from below.  
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐  
senger's side are activated or deactivated.  
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.  
Indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags  
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger  
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating  
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.  
General information  
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐  
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐  
structions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
The light indicates whether the airbags are either  
activated or deactivated.  
Safety information  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
shortly lights up and then indicates whether the  
airbags are either activated or deactivated.  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag function,  
the system must be able to detect whether a  
person is sitting in the front passenger seat.  
The entire seat cushion area must be used for  
this purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Make sure that the front passenger  
keeps his or her feet in the floor area.  
▷ The indicator light lights up  
when a child is properly  
seated in a child restraint sys‐  
tem or when the seat is  
empty. The airbags on the  
front passenger side are not  
activated.  
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for  
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐  
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐  
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐  
vated.  
Fault of the automatic  
deactivation system  
When transporting older children and adults, the  
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in  
certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator  
light for the front passenger airbags lights up.  
Detected child restraint systems  
In this case, change the seat position so that the  
front passenger airbags are activated and the in‐  
dicator light goes out.  
The system generally detects children seated in  
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐  
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point  
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐  
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure  
that the indicator light for the front passenger air‐  
bags lights up. This indicates that the child re‐  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have  
the person sit in the rear.  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat cushion:  
183  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
straint system has been detected and the front  
passenger airbags are not activated.  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Intelligent Safety  
Warning  
Due to system limits, individual functions can  
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the  
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a  
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety  
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.  
Principle  
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the  
driver assistance systems.  
General information  
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐  
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems  
that can help prevent an imminent collision.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
▷ Approach control warning with light braking  
function.  
▷ Evasion Assistant.  
▷ Intersection collision warning.  
▷ Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation.  
▷ Lane departure warning.  
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.  
▷ Side collision mitigation.  
Intelligent Safety  
Safety information  
Warning  
Turning on/off  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐  
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems activate according to the  
last setting.  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Warning  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
184  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Press the button.  
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐  
ings may vary with the current driving situation.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
When the vehicle is driven so that it is intention‐  
ally approaching another vehicle, the Forward  
Collision Warning and brake intervention are de‐  
layed in order to avoid false system reactions.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as  
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of  
the menu are activated.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver  
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐  
tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the  
system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐  
sion and visibility also affect the timing of the  
warnings.  
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐  
ing settings are switched between:  
Safety information  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning  
time.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Approach control warning  
with light braking function  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Warning warns of a possi‐  
ble risk of collision and may brake independently.  
In the event of an accident, the system may re‐  
duce impact speed.  
Warning  
Due to system limits, individual functions can  
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the  
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a  
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety  
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation.  
The system issues a two-phase warning of a  
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds  
185  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Press the button repeatedly.  
Overview  
The following settings are switched be‐  
Button in the vehicle  
tween:  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
Manual switching off  
Intelligent Safety  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
Button Status  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor.  
Additional information:  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning on/off  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Turning on automatically  
The system is automatically active when the ve‐  
hicle is turned on.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Switching on manually  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Early"  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as  
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of  
the menu are activated.  
▷ "Medium"  
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.  
186  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Brake intervention  
Warning with braking function  
Display  
A warning symbol appears in the instrument  
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐  
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐  
nent.  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a  
warning is active, the maximum braking force is  
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal  
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐  
fully.  
The system may also assist in braking if there is  
a risk of collision.  
Icon Measure  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the  
vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Icon lights up red: prewarning.  
Brake and increase distance.  
City brake function: the brake intervention occurs  
to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic  
signal sounds: acute warning.  
With radar sensor: the brake intervention occurs  
to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,  
if necessary.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the  
brake intervention occurs as a brief braking pres‐  
sure. No automatic delay occurs.  
Prewarning  
The brake intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively  
moving the steering wheel.  
This warning is provided, for instance when there  
is impending danger of a collision or the distance  
to the vehicle ahead is too small.  
The system’s ability to detect objects may be  
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the  
limitations of the system and actively intervene  
as warranted.  
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking  
as warranted.  
Acute warning with braking function  
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐  
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐  
proaches another object at a high differential  
speed.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐  
pending on the driving situation and the equip‐  
ment version, the acute warning may be accom‐  
panied by a brief activation of the braking  
system.  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐  
tivation of the braking system is omitted.  
If an acute warning is provided, the system may  
also provide assistance, such as through auto‐  
matic brake intervention, when there is risk of  
collision.  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prior warning.  
187  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷ In tight curves.  
Detection range  
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐  
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
Warning sensitivity  
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for  
example the warning time, the more warnings are  
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐  
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐  
actions.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Only objects that are detected by the system are  
taken into account.  
Evasion Assistant  
Thus, a system reaction might not come or  
might come late.  
The following situations may not be detected, for  
instance:  
Principle  
The Evasion Assistant supports the driver in  
making evasive maneuvers in certain situations,  
such as when obstacles or persons suddenly ap‐  
pear.  
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach  
them at high speed.  
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,  
or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
General information  
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view.  
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
The system issues a warning and intervenes to  
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is  
possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐  
ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies  
space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐  
sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐  
viding targeted supporting steering movements.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐  
low this speed, the system is reactivated.  
Safety information  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Warning  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
188  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warning with evasion support  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If a collision with a detected vehicle or a detected  
person is imminent, a warning symbol appears  
on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up  
Display.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Icon Measure  
Icon lights up red: prewarning.  
Brake and increase distance.  
Overview  
Sensors  
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic  
signal sounds: acute warning for obsta‐  
cles.  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,  
if necessary.  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ Front radar sensor.  
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic  
signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐  
destrians.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,  
if necessary.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Acute warning with evasion support  
An acute warning is displayed when there is an  
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle  
approaching another object at a high speed.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Pedestrian Warning with braking function is  
switched on.  
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The  
system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐  
ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision.  
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitiga‐  
tion, refer to page 194.  
▷ Approach control warning with light braking  
function is switched on.  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prior warning.  
Approach control warning with light braking  
function, refer to page 185.  
System limits  
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around  
the vehicle.  
Safety information  
Turning on/off  
The system is automatically active when the ve‐  
hicle is turned on.  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
189  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
▷ In tight curves.  
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐  
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
Detection range  
Intersection collision  
warning  
Principle  
The system may prevent some accidents with  
cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the  
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐  
pact speed.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
The system sounds a warning in the city speed  
range before an imminent collision and activates  
brakes independently, if needed.  
Only objects that are detected by the system are  
taken into account.  
Thus, a system reaction might not come or  
might come late.  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation.  
The following situations may not be detected, for  
example:  
Vehicles that cross your driving direction can be  
detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐  
cles enter into the detection range of the system.  
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach  
them at high speed.  
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐  
sued when a danger of collision with crossing  
traffic is detected.  
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,  
or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view.  
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
The system issues a two-phase warning of a  
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds  
above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of  
warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐  
tion.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument  
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐  
tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐  
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the  
timing of the warnings.  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
190  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Intelligent Safety  
Safety information  
Warning  
Sensors  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ Front radar sensor.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Turning on/off  
Turning on automatically  
The system is automatically active when the ve‐  
hicle is turned on.  
Switching on manually  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
Warning  
Due to system limits, individual functions can  
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the  
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a  
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety  
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as  
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of  
the menu are activated.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
191  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Manual switching off  
Icon Meaning  
Danger of collision with vehicle cross‐  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
ing from the right.  
Danger of collision with vehicle cross‐  
ing from the left.  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Danger of collision with vehicle for  
which the driving direction cannot be  
determined.  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Display with prewarning  
The respective icon lights up red: prewarning for  
vehicles that cross your driving direction.  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Intervene yourself, for instance by braking.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
Display with acute warning  
The respective icon flashes red and an acoustic  
signal sounds: acute warning when vehicles  
cross your driving direction.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Early"  
Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐  
sary.  
Prewarning  
For example, a prewarning is displayed when a  
danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐  
tected.  
▷ "Medium"  
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.  
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking  
as warranted.  
Warning with braking function  
Display  
Acute warning with braking function  
An acute warning is displayed in the event of an  
immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐  
hicle.  
General information  
A warning symbol appears in the instrument  
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐  
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐  
nent.  
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an  
acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐  
vide assistance, such as through automatic brake  
intervention, when there is risk of collision.  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prior warning.  
192  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Brake intervention  
Detection range  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
The system may also assist in braking if there is  
a risk of collision.  
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.  
The brake intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively  
moving the steering wheel.  
The system’s ability to detect objects may be  
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the  
limitations of the system and actively intervene  
as warranted.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Thus, a system reaction might not come or  
might come late.  
The following situations may not be detected, for  
instance:  
System limits  
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by  
buildings, for instance.  
Safety information  
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,  
or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
▷ Crossing bicycles.  
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to crossing vehicles when  
your own speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
▷ In tight curves.  
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐  
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
Warning sensitivity  
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for  
example the warning time, the more warnings are  
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐  
193  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐  
actions.  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Pedestrian Warning with  
City Collision Mitigation  
Warning  
Due to system limits, individual functions can  
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the  
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a  
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety  
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.  
Principle  
The Pedestrian Warning warns in the city speed  
range of possible risk of collision with pedes‐  
trians and bicycle riders and may brake inde‐  
pendently. In the event of an accident, the sys‐  
tem may reduce impact speed.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of  
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds  
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists  
who are within the detection range of the sys‐  
tem.  
Safety information  
Intelligent Safety  
Warning  
Sensors  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
194  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Press the button repeatedly.  
Detection range  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
The detection range in front of the vehicle is div‐  
ided into two areas:  
Manual switching off  
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the  
vehicle.  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left  
of the central area.  
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located  
within the central area. A warning is issued about  
pedestrians who are located within the extended  
area only if they are moving in the direction of the  
central area.  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Turning on/off  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Turning on automatically  
The system is automatically active when the ve‐  
hicle is turned on.  
Warning with braking function  
Display  
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐  
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐  
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.  
Switching on manually  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
The red icon is displayed and a signal  
sounds.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as  
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of  
the menu are activated.  
Alternatively, depending on the vehicle  
equipment, a red warning triangle lights  
up in the instrument cluster.  
Intervene immediately by braking or make an  
evasive maneuver.  
195  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐  
sued late.  
Brake intervention  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
While a warning is active, the maximum braking  
force is used when the brake is applied. In order  
to activate the Brake Assistant function, the  
brakes must be applied sufficiently quickly and  
forcefully.  
The following situations may not be detected, for  
instance:  
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.  
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐  
cause of the viewing angle or contour.  
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also  
assist with brake intervention.  
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.  
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than  
32 in/80 cm.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the  
vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
The brake intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively  
moving the steering wheel.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
The system’s ability to detect objects may be  
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the  
limitations of the system and actively intervene  
as warranted.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited or may not be availa‐  
ble in the following situations:  
System limits  
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐  
activated, for instance DSC OFF.  
Safety information  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Lane departure warning  
Principle  
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐  
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.  
General information  
This camera-based system warns starting at a  
minimum speed.  
Upper speed limit  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists  
when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Warnings are issued by means of a steering  
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering  
wheel vibration can be adjusted.  
Detection range  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
196  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be‐  
fore leaving the lane.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Depending on the equipment version, if in the  
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane  
marking is crossed, the system may intervene  
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐  
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the  
vehicle in the lane.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Intelligent Safety  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐  
sponse to a warning.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Warning  
Turning on/off  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Turning on automatically  
The lane departure warning activates automati‐  
cally after departure if the function was switched  
on at the completion of the last trip.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every driving  
off. The base setting is thereby activated.  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the lane departure warning to be active.  
Switching on manually  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as  
197  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of  
the menu are activated.  
lane markings in curves or with dynamic  
passing without blinker.  
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems.  
Manual switching off  
Press and hold this button.  
Switch steering intervention on/off  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
The steering intervention can be switched on  
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐  
tion and lane departure warning.  
Button Status  
1. "CAR"  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. "Steering intervention"  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active after  
every driving off.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
2. "Settings"  
The icon illuminates green: at lane mark‐  
ing was detected on at least one side of  
the vehicle and warnings can be issued.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Early"  
Warning function  
If you leave the lane  
▷ "Medium"  
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has  
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐  
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐  
pressed depending on the situation,  
for instance when purposely driving over  
198  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐  
ting.  
System limits  
When the turn signal is switched on in the corre‐  
sponding direction before changing the lane, a  
warning is not issued.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the equipment version: if, in the  
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane  
marking is crossed, the system may intervene  
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐  
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps  
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐  
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel  
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐  
ing an active steering intervention, the display in  
the instrument cluster will blink.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Warning signal  
Depending on the equipment version: in the  
event of multiple active steering interventions by  
the system within 3 minutes without the driver's  
intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic  
warning will sound. A short warning signal will  
sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐  
ginning with the third steering intervention, an  
continuous warning will sound.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings  
such as in construction areas.  
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐  
played.  
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.  
The warning signal and Check Control message  
are an encouragement to pay closer attention to  
the lane.  
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐  
jects.  
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front  
of you.  
End of warning  
For instance, the warning will be canceled in the  
following situations:  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is not fully functional.  
▷ Automatically after a few seconds.  
▷ When returning to your own lane.  
▷ When braking hard.  
▷ When blinking.  
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts.  
199  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
displayed on the Control Display in the menu for  
the steering intervention.  
Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
Safety information  
Principle  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in  
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐  
hind in the adjacent lane.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
The light in the exterior mirror warns the driver in  
different steps.  
General information  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and next  
to the vehicle when traveling faster than a mini‐  
mum speed.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
The system indicates whether there are vehicles  
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.  
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.  
Before you change lanes after setting the turn  
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐  
tions described above.  
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the  
steering wheel vibrates.  
Intelligent Safety  
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds  
of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐  
tervene with a brief active steering intervention  
and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.  
The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐  
mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is  
200  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning on/off  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Turning on automatically  
Active Blind Spot Detection is automatically acti‐  
vated after departure if the function was  
switched on at the completion of the last trip.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Switching on manually  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. "CAR"  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as  
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of  
the menu are activated.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems.  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
Vehicles with side collision  
mitigation: switching steering  
intervention on/off  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
The steering intervention can be switched on  
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐  
tion and lane departure warning.  
Manual switching off  
1. "CAR"  
Press and hold this button.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
201  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
6. "Steering intervention"  
Flashing of the light  
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking  
serves as system self-test.  
System limits  
Warning function  
Safety information  
Light in the exterior mirror  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Prewarning  
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates  
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐  
proaching from behind.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
Acute warning  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐  
sponds according to the setting.  
When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐  
cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐  
brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror  
flashes brightly.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area or the turn signal has been  
deactivated.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
▷ On vehicles with side collision warning: cam‐  
eras, refer to page 35.  
Vehicles with side collision  
mitigation  
When there is no response to the vibration of the  
steering wheel at speeds of up to  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is  
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active  
steering intervention. The steering intervention  
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐  
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering  
wheel and can be manually overridden at any  
time.  
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.  
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
202  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the  
steering intervention can be limited, for instance  
in the following situation:  
General information  
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings  
such as in construction areas.  
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.  
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐  
jects.  
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the ve‐  
hicle when traveling faster than a minimum  
speed of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.  
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front  
of you.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
▷ If the camera is impaired.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
The front camera determines the lane marking  
positions.  
A Check Control message is displayed when the  
system is not fully functional.  
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next  
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with  
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision.  
For this purpose, the system issues a warning  
with a blinking LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐  
brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system  
will carry out an active steering intervention.  
Displaying warnings  
Depending on the selected warning settings,  
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can  
be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐  
cess of premature warnings of critical situations.  
Safety information  
Side collision mitigation  
Principle  
Warning  
The side collision warning helps to avoid immi‐  
nent side collisions.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
203  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Switching on manually  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐  
vention to be active.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as  
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of  
the menu are activated.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
Intelligent Safety  
Sensors  
Manual switching off  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Turning on/off  
Turning on automatically  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
The side collision mitigation activates automati‐  
cally after departure if the function was switched  
on at the completion of the last trip.  
204  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. "CAR"  
System limits  
Safety information  
2. "Settings"  
Warning  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems.  
Warning function  
Light in the exterior mirror  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
Acute warning  
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.  
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐  
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐  
brates.  
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings  
such as in construction areas.  
A Check Control message is displayed at the  
same time.  
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
If necessary, an active steering intervention takes  
place to prevent the collision and maintain the  
vehicle within its own lane.  
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐  
jects.  
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front  
of you.  
The steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overridden  
at any time.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message is displayed when the  
system is not fully functional.  
205  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐  
ket version, the rear-end collision preparation can  
react to vehicles approaching from behind.  
General information  
Overview  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehi‐  
cle.  
Switching on/off  
The system is automatically active when the ve‐  
hicle is turned on.  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as as fol‐  
lows:  
▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning flashers  
will be switched on.  
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐  
tions:  
▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions are  
triggered.  
▷ When driving in reverse.  
System limits  
Safety information  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Warning  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
▷ The approaching vehicle is approaching  
slowly.  
206  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
▷ The function can be activated at speeds of  
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h.  
If equipped with Equipment  
Stop Assistant  
Principle  
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the Emer‐  
gency Stop Assistant helps to safely bring the  
vehicle to a standstill.  
▷ With lane change function: lane changes are  
executed when the traffic situation allows.  
Activating the emergency stop  
function  
General information  
The emergency stop function is not triggered  
automatically. The emergency stop function can  
only be triggered manually by the occupants.  
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly  
to activate the emergency stop function.  
▷ With lane change function: releasing the  
switch may trigger an automatic lane change.  
When the system is activated, the vehicle is  
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of  
lane guidance.  
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for  
a maximum of 2 minutes.  
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.  
▷ An emergency call is triggered.  
Depending on the equipment version and na‐  
tional market version, the system includes a lane  
change function.  
With lane change function: on motorways or mo‐  
torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle  
to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐  
ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐  
tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the  
actual road.  
Canceling the emergency stop  
function  
The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐  
tion by actively taking control of the vehicle  
throughout the entire process.  
For instance, the emergency stop function will  
be canceled in the following situations:  
Overview  
▷ When steering.  
▷ When blinking.  
▷ When depressing the accelerator pedal.  
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐  
tem.  
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request.  
▷ When switching the selector lever position at  
standstill.  
▷ When the switch of the parking brake is  
pressed.  
Parking brake  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system  
will carry out the following settings:  
207  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷ The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  
▷ The interior lights are switched on.  
The system cannot replace the driving perform‐  
ance of a driver who is fit to drive.  
▷ The central locking system is unlocked.  
BMW Drive Recorder  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Principle  
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video re‐  
cordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to  
document surrounding traffic.  
Icon  
Status  
Emergency Stop function active.  
General information  
There are various ways for storing video record‐  
ings:  
Without lane change function:  
Icon Status  
▷ Automatic storage of the recording.  
Green steering wheel symbol:  
The function allows the documentation of the  
event of an accident.  
When lane markings are detected, the  
system keeps the vehicle in the lane.  
▷ Manual storage of the recording.  
Gray steering wheel symbol:  
The function allows the documentation of  
traffic situations.  
Lane guidance is briefly interrupted.  
The system records up to 20 seconds before  
and after the activation of the storage.  
Yellow steering wheel symbol:  
Lane marking driven over.  
Cameras of the assistance systems are used, for  
instance Panorama View.  
When lane markings are detected, the  
system keeps the vehicle in the lane.  
Additionally, the following parameters are stored  
for the trip:  
Yellow steering wheel symbol:  
▷ Date.  
The hands are not grasping the steer‐  
ing wheel. The system is still active.  
▷ Time.  
▷ Vehicle speed.  
Red steering wheel symbol and a sig‐  
nal sounds:  
▷ Global Positioning System coordinates.  
The hands are not grasping the steer‐  
ing wheel. Interruption of lane guidance  
is imminent.  
Data protection  
The permissibility of recording and using video  
recordings is contingent upon the statutory regu‐  
lations of the country in which the system is to  
be used. The user is responsible for the use of  
the system and compliance with the respective  
regulations.  
Red steering wheel symbol and a sig‐  
nal sounds:  
Lane guidance is switched off.  
System limits  
Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐  
ure.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory  
constraints on use of the system in your state or  
country prior to the initial use. In addition, the  
208  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
laws with respect to use of the system should be  
verified in regular intervals, especially when bor‐  
ders are frequently crossed.  
Via iDrive  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Start recording"  
To stop the recording: "Cancel".  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed  
about the system. In addition, information about  
the system is required when handing off the ve‐  
hicle.  
Recording can also be started by selecting the  
widget on the Control Display.  
Functional requirements  
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
▷ Privacy Policy accepted.  
Recording playback and  
administration  
Stored video recordings can be played back, ex‐  
ported and deleted.  
▷ Recording type selected.  
▷ Recording time selected.  
For your own safety, the video recording is only  
displayed on the Control Display up to approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market versions,  
the video recording is only displayed if the park‐  
ing brake is engaged or if the selector lever is in  
selector lever position P.  
Activating/deactivating the BMW  
Drive Recorder  
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐  
fore the first use of the recording function.  
1. "Apps"  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Saved recordings"  
4. Select desired recording.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. Accept Privacy Policy.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Recording allowed"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
If a camera change occurred during the record‐  
ing, different segments of the video can be se‐  
lected.  
Recording functions  
Automatic recording  
Settings  
The recording is stored automatically when the  
vehicle sensors detect an accident occurrence.  
General information  
Different settings can be made.  
Manual recording  
Recording type  
1. "Apps"  
Using the button  
Press and hold this button.  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Settings"  
4. "RECORDING TYPE"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
209  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Certain functions of several systems can, within  
the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐  
gering:  
Recording time  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Settings"  
▷ Forward Collision Warning: automatic brake  
intervention.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant  
▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐  
nent rear collisions.  
Cameras  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Settings"  
Safety information  
4. "Camera selection"  
5. Select desired camera.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system  
limits, critical situation could not be detected  
reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
In case of an accident, the system switches au‐  
tomatically to "All" cameras.  
If driver assistance systems are active, their cam‐  
era views are selected automatically.  
System limits  
In the event of serious accidents, it may not be  
possible to store recordings if the damage on the  
vehicle is too great or the power supply was in‐  
terrupted.  
Function  
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and  
front passenger's belt straps are automatically  
tightened once after driving away.  
In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐  
vidual functions become active as needed:  
Active Protection  
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety  
belts.  
Principle  
Active Protection prepares occupants and the  
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or  
collision situations.  
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow  
gap.  
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐  
cluding sun protection.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐  
ket version, Active Protection consists of various  
PreCrash functions.  
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in  
the front: automatic positioning of the back‐  
rest for the front passenger seat.  
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐  
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.  
The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐  
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This  
includes the following critical driving situations:  
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,  
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐  
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the  
safety belt before continuing on your trip.  
▷ Emergency stop.  
▷ Severe understeering.  
▷ Severe oversteering.  
210  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
All other systems can be restored to the desired  
setting.  
Fatigue alert  
Principle  
PostCrash – iBrake  
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert‐  
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto‐  
nous trips, for instance on highways. The system  
recommends a break.  
Principle  
In the event of an accident, PostCrash can bring  
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐  
vention by the driver in certain situations.  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
PostCrash can reduce the risk of another colli‐  
sion and subsequent consequences.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's  
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or  
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected  
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure  
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐  
matically.  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring  
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake  
Assistant allows.  
Function  
The system is switched on each time drive-ready  
state is switched on.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.  
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be  
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved  
by the automatic braking function. Automatic  
braking is interrupted.  
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐  
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐  
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.  
This procedure takes the following criteria into  
account:  
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
Interrupting automatic braking  
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐  
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐  
sive maneuver.  
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of  
trip.  
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of  
the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐  
era.  
Interrupt automatic braking:  
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.  
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.  
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system  
is active and can also display a recommendation  
to take a break.  
211  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Break recommendation  
Adjusting  
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each  
switching on of drive-ready state and can thus  
display a break recommendation.  
The break recommendation can also be  
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Display  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a  
message is displayed in the Control Display with  
the recommendation to take a break.  
During the display, various settings can be se‐  
lected.  
After a break, another recommendation to take a  
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐  
mately 45 minutes.  
System limits  
The function may be limited in the following sit‐  
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no  
warning at all:  
▷ When the time is set incorrectly.  
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below  
about 43 mph/70 km/h.  
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
▷ In active driving situations, such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
▷ When the road condition is poor.  
▷ In the event of strong side winds.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a  
break during longer trips on highways.  
212  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Adaptive brake assistant  
In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC,  
this system ensures that the brakes respond  
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐  
tions.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Drive-off assistant  
Principle  
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on  
uphill grades.  
Antilock Braking System  
ABS  
Driving off  
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.  
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without  
delay.  
The Antilock Braking System (ABS) prevents  
locking of the wheels during braking.  
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is  
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.  
The vehicle maintains its steerability even during  
emergency braking, which increases the active  
driving safety.  
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle  
may roll back slightly.  
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐  
gine.  
DSC Dynamic Stability  
Control  
Brake assistant  
The Brake Assistant effects maximum braking  
assistance when the brake is applied quickly. It  
reduces the braking distance to a minimum dur‐  
ing emergency braking. The advantages of the  
Antilock Braking System (ABS) are thereby uti‐  
lized.  
Principle  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) helps to  
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing  
drive power and by brake intervention on individ‐  
ual wheels.  
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal  
for the duration of emergency braking.  
General information  
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐  
ditions, for instance:  
213  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
Deactivating/activating DSC  
General information  
▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐  
duced during acceleration and when driving in  
curves.  
Safety information  
To increase driving stability, activate DSC again  
as soon as possible.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Deactivating DSC  
Hold the button down until DSC OFF is  
displayed in the instrument cluster and  
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.  
Activating DSC  
Press the button.  
Warning  
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator  
light turn off.  
When driving with a roof load, for instance with  
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐  
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk  
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐  
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of  
damage to property. Driving with roof load only  
with activated Dynamic Stability Control.  
Display  
In the instrument cluster  
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed  
in the instrument cluster.  
Indicator/warning lights  
Overview  
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐  
activated.  
Button in the vehicle  
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls  
the drive and braking forces.  
The indicator light lights up: DSC has  
malfunctioned.  
DSC OFF  
214  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Activating/deactivating DTC  
DTC Dynamic Traction  
Control  
Activating DTC  
Press the button.  
Principle  
Dynamic Traction Control (DTC) is a version of  
the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) where drive  
power is optimized.  
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF  
lights up.  
The system ensures maximum drive power on  
unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed  
snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but  
with somewhat limited driving stability.  
Deactivating DTC  
Press the button again.  
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator  
light turn off.  
General information  
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐  
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during  
acceleration and when driving in curves.  
Display  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in  
the instrument cluster.  
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in  
the following situations:  
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-  
covered roads.  
Indicator/warning lights  
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose  
ground.  
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐  
vated.  
▷ When driving with tire chains.  
Automatic program change  
Overview  
In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability Con‐  
trol (DSC) is activated automatically:  
Button in the vehicle  
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐  
tion ACC is activated.  
▷ On a brake intervention by the Intelligent  
Safety systems.  
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.  
xDrive  
DSC OFF  
Principle  
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐  
cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and and  
other suspension control systems, such as Dy‐  
215  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
namic Stability Control (DSC), further optimizes  
traction and driving dynamics.  
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in  
the same direction as the front wheels. For in‐  
stance, this results in a harmonious lane change.  
General information  
xDrive variably distributes the driving power to  
the front and rear axles as demanded by the driv‐  
ing situation and road condition.  
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active  
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐  
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the  
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐  
steering.  
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change  
the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented  
to sport oriented.  
Tuning  
The system offers several different tunings.  
Because of the needs-based use of the all-  
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐  
tion in consumption.  
Driving mode  
Integral Active Steering  
COMFORT  
ECO PRO  
Comfortable, for optimal  
travel comfort.  
M sport differential  
SPORT  
Dynamic, for greater agility.  
The active M differential provides for continu‐  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differential  
depending on the driving situation. This prevents  
spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby pro‐  
vides optimal traction in any driving situation.  
The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐  
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐  
trol.  
Additional information:  
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐  
ing style to the situation.  
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 138.  
Using tire chains  
In order to guarantee free movement of the  
wheels when operating with tire chains, rear axle  
steering of the integral active steering must be  
switched off when tire chains are mounted.  
Integral Active Steering  
Principle  
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐  
neuverability and makes a more direct steering  
response possible.  
Additional information:  
Rear axle steering during operation with tire  
chains, refer to page 341.  
General information  
Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐  
ble steering ratio and rear axle steering.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel  
must be turned further at lower speeds, while the  
vehicle responds more sensitively to steering  
wheel movements in the higher speed range.  
The steering is more direct because the variable  
steering ratio amplifies the wheel angle while  
maneuvering. The rear axle steering acts to in‐  
crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning  
the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction  
to the front wheels.  
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐  
activated.  
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.  
216  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Have the system checked by a dealer's service  
center or another qualified service center or re‐  
pair shop.  
Variable sport steering  
The variable sport steering facilitates direct and  
agile handling with little steering effort. The varia‐  
ble sports steering works independently of the  
current speed, varying the steering ratio in line  
with the steering angle.  
217  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Operation  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Turning on  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
The current speed is accepted as the speed  
limit.  
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is  
stationary or driving at low speeds,  
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.  
The marking in the speedometer is set to the  
corresponding speed.  
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐  
namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving  
mode may be switched on as well.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
Principle  
The system can be used to set a speed limit, for  
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding  
speed limits.  
Turning off  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐  
lowing situations, for example:  
General information  
The system can limit the speed, starting at a  
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be  
driven at any speed below the set speed limit.  
▷ When the engine is switched off.  
▷ When cruise control is switched on.  
▷ When certain programs are activated via the  
Driving Dynamics Control.  
Overview  
The displays turn off.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Interrupting  
If the reverse gear is engaged or at idle, the sys‐  
tem is interrupted when rolling backwards.  
Button Function  
System on/off.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐  
gested speed manually.  
Rocker switch:  
Changing the speed limit.  
218  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Changing the speed limit  
Warning when the speed limit is  
exceeded  
Visual warning  
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐  
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes  
while the vehicle speed is greater than  
the set speed limit.  
Acoustic warning  
▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,  
a signal sounds.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed limit is set.  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the  
resistance point, the speed limit increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below the  
vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds  
after some time.  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past  
the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex‐  
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal  
all the way down, there is no signal.  
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally  
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐  
hicle is not actively braked.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a  
value below the current speed, the vehicle  
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the system.  
The current speed can also be stored by press‐  
ing a button:  
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐  
tive.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐  
rupted.  
Exceeding the speed limit  
▷ No marking: system is  
switched off.  
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed  
limit, a warning is issued.  
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.  
There is no warning in this case.  
Indicator light  
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to  
intentionally exceed the set speed limit.  
▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐  
tem is switched on.  
When the vehicle speed drops below the set  
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.  
▷ The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐  
terrupted.  
219  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Cruise control  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Principle  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad‐  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys‐  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
Overview  
General information  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Button Function  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain condi‐  
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐  
pending on the driving mode.  
Cruise control on/off.  
Safety information  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Warning  
Pause cruise control.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐  
gested speed manually.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
Switching cruise control on/off  
Turning on  
Warning  
The use of the system can lead to an increased  
risk of accidents in the following situations,  
for instance:  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer‐  
ing wheel.  
▷ On winding roads.  
▷ In heavy traffic.  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light  
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to  
the current speed.  
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐  
age to property. Only use the system if driving  
at constant speed is possible.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as set speed.  
220  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set speed.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐  
eter.  
Turning off  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer‐  
ing wheel.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐  
ton.  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
Press the button.  
Pausing cruise control  
Changing the speed  
Interrupting manually  
When active, press the button.  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations, for example:  
▷ When braking manually.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
▷ Steptronic transmission: gear lever position D  
is disengaged.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the  
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road  
is clear.  
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts.  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Setting the speed  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past  
the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
The maximum speed that can be set de‐  
pends on the vehicle.  
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance  
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or  
decelerates without pressure on the acceler‐  
ator pedal.  
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐  
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the  
switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted.  
221  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
Continuing cruise control  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed.  
Make sure that the difference between current  
speed and stored speed is not too large before  
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐  
tional deceleration or acceleration may occur.  
System limits  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if  
the drive power is insufficient.  
Press the button with the system inter‐  
rupted.  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐  
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in  
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill  
grades.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value is  
deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Active Cruise Control with  
Stop&Go function ACC  
▷ When the system is switched off.  
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Principle  
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and a  
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted us‐  
ing the buttons on the steering wheel.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the system.  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto‐  
matically.  
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐  
tive, the marking indicates the  
desired speed.  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The  
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐  
lows.  
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐  
rupted, the marking indicates  
the stored speed.  
▷ No marking: system is switched off.  
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective  
speed.  
Indicator light  
▷ Indicator light green: system is active.  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and  
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,  
the system is able to detect this within the given  
system limits.  
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain condi‐  
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐  
pending on the driving mode.  
Displays in the Head-up Display  
Some system information can also be displayed  
in the Head-up Display.  
222  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving  
vehicle.  
Safety information  
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.  
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Warning  
With steering and traffic jam assistant:  
Cruise control on/off.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
With steering and traffic jam assistant:  
Select function.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐  
tant:  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
Cruise control on/off.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐  
gested speed manually.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
With steering and traffic jam assistant:  
Pause cruise control.  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐  
tant:  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐  
tant:  
Warning  
Pause cruise control.  
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐  
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐  
ing situations:  
Increase the distance.  
Switch distance control on/off.  
223  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Set function  
When the system is active, press the  
button repeatedly until the desired func‐  
tion is selected in the toolbar. The toolbar for As‐  
sisted Driving mode is displayed at the bottom of  
the instrument cluster.  
Button Function  
Reduce distance.  
Switch distance control on/off.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
Icon Function  
Sensors  
Cruise control with distance control.  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ Front radar sensor.  
Depending on the equipment version,  
cruise control with distance control and  
steering and traffic jam assistant.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-constructed  
roads.  
The selected function is shown in green.  
Turning on  
With steering and traffic jam assistant:  
The minimum speed that can be set is  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and, e.g., depends on the vehicle and the vehicle  
equipment.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
The system can also be activated when station‐  
ary.  
2.  
If necessary, set the cruise control.  
Without steering and traffic jam assistant:  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
Turning on/off and interrupting  
cruise control  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light  
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to  
the current speed.  
With steering and traffic jam  
assistant: Assisted Driving Mode  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as set speed.  
General information  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
This button is used to switch the config‐  
ured function on and off.  
The button can be used to set the pri‐  
marily used function.  
Turning off  
To switch off the system while standing, step on  
brake pedal at the same time.  
Press the button on the steering wheel:  
224  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
With steering and traffic jam assistant.  
Setting the speed  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐  
tant.  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
Interrupting manually  
When active, press the button on the steering  
wheel:  
With steering and traffic jam assistant.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐  
tivated.  
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐  
tant.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
If interrupting the system while stationary, press  
on the brake pedal at the same time.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐  
eter.  
Interrupting automatically  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations:  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐  
ton.  
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.  
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.  
Press the button.  
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.  
Changing the speed  
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are  
opened while the vehicle is standing still.  
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an  
extended period, for instance on a road with  
very little traffic without curb or shoulder  
markings.  
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,  
for instance by contamination or heavy pre‐  
cipitation.  
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐  
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐  
tem.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the  
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road  
is clear.  
225  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
according to the traffic situation or the ambient  
conditions, for instance poor visibility.  
1. "CAR"  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past  
the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"  
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the  
action.  
Adjusting the distance  
Safety information  
Continuing cruise control  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed.  
Warning  
Make sure that the difference between current  
speed and stored speed is not too large before  
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐  
tional deceleration or acceleration may occur.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system  
limits, deceleration can be late. There may be a  
risk of accident or risk of damage to property.  
Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Ad‐  
just the distance to the traffic and weather con‐  
ditions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐  
tance, possibly by braking.  
Press the button on the steering wheel with the  
system interrupted:  
With steering and traffic jam assistant.  
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐  
tant.  
Reduce distance  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐  
ues.  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value is  
deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.  
▷ When the system is switched off.  
Increase the distance  
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.  
Automatic adaptation of the  
distance  
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐  
ket version: the system can be adjusted so that  
the distance to the vehicle driving in front is auto‐  
matically adjusted within the configured distance  
226  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the system.  
Changing between cruise control  
with/without distance control  
Safety information  
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐  
tive, the marking indicates the  
desired speed.  
Warning  
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐  
rupted, the marking indicates  
the stored speed.  
The system does not react to traffic driving  
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored  
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Adjust the set speed to  
the traffic conditions and brake as needed.  
▷ No marking: system is switched off.  
Distance to vehicle ahead of you  
Change over mode of the cruise  
control  
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is  
shown.  
Switching cruise control without distance control  
off and on:  
Icon  
Description  
Distance 1  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on  
distance control:  
Distance 2  
Distance 3  
Distance 4  
Press the button.  
Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch  
on distance control:  
▷
Press the button.  
▷
Press the button.  
After changing, a Check Control message is dis‐  
played.  
This value is set automatically  
after the system is switched on.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
No distance control display, as  
the accelerator pedal is being  
pressed.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
227  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Detected vehicle  
Icon  
Description  
Symbol flashes gray:  
Icon  
Description  
Green icon:  
The conditions are not adequate  
for the system to work.  
A vehicle has been detected  
ahead of you.  
The system was deactivated but  
applies the brakes until you ac‐  
tively resume control by press‐  
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐  
erator pedal.  
When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐  
creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐  
play will move away.  
Vehicle symbol flashes red and a  
signal sounds:  
If necessary, independent drive-off, such as by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by pressing  
the rocker switch.  
Brake and make an evasive ma‐  
neuver, if necessary.  
Alternative displays  
Indicator/warning lights  
Icon  
Description  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is  
active.  
Vehicle symbol white:  
No distance control display, as  
the accelerator pedal is being  
pressed.  
No indicator light: system is  
switched off.  
Vehicle symbol flashes:  
Green icon:  
The conditions are not adequate  
for the system to work.  
A vehicle has been detected  
ahead of you.  
The system was deactivated but  
applies the brakes until you ac‐  
tively resume control by press‐  
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐  
erator pedal.  
The vehicle symbol goes out if  
no vehicle in front is detected.  
Vehicle symbol flashes green:  
Vehicle in front drove off.  
The vehicle symbol and dis‐  
tance bars blink red and an  
acoustic signal sounds:  
Gray icon:  
System interrupted.  
Brake and make an evasive ma‐  
neuver, if necessary.  
System interrupted.  
228  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be  
detected.  
Displays in the Head-up Display  
Set speed  
Some system information can also be displayed  
in the Head-up Display.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the following  
situations:  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road  
users.  
▷ Depending on the equipment, with red traffic  
lights.  
Distance information  
The icon is displayed when the distance  
from the vehicle traveling ahead is too  
short.  
▷ For cross traffic.  
▷ For oncoming traffic.  
The distance information is active in the follow‐  
ing situations:  
Merging vehicles  
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.  
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected.  
Head-Up Display, refer to page 170.  
▷ Distance too short.  
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.  
System limits  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges  
into your lane, the system may not be able to au‐  
tomatically restore the selected distance. It may  
not be possible to restore the selected distance  
in certain situations, including if you are driving  
significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of  
you, for instance when rapidly approaching a  
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reli‐  
ably detected, the system requests that the  
driver intervene by braking and carrying out eva‐  
sive maneuvers, if needed.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Detection range  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
229  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Cornering  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐  
orable weather or light conditions:  
▷ Poorer vehicle detection.  
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are  
already recognized.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic  
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐  
stance by braking, steering or evading.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve, the  
speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may  
not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve  
at an appropriate speed.  
Drive power  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if  
the drive power is insufficient.  
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐  
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle  
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐  
tected very late.  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐  
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in  
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill  
grades.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be applied.  
General information  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the  
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you  
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After  
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐  
activated and controls speed independently.  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this  
new speed value can be applied for the following  
systems:  
▷ Manual Speed Limiter.  
▷ Cruise control.  
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function  
ACC.  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
The speed value is suggested as the new de‐  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti‐  
vated.  
▷ On steep uphill grades.  
▷ In front of bumps in the road.  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
230  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
Safety information  
▷ "Show anticipation": current and upcom‐  
ing speed limits are displayed in the in‐  
strument cluster without being applied.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
▷ "Show current limit": current speed limits  
are displayed without being applied in the  
instrument cluster.  
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed Limit  
Assistant will be turned off.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Warning  
A message is displayed in the instrument cluster  
when the system and a driver assistance system  
are activated.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Icon  
Function  
Depending on the equipment ver‐  
sion, the indicator light illuminates  
green, together with the icon for a  
cruise control system:  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Speed Limit Assistant is active and  
detected speed limits can be ap‐  
plied manually for the displayed  
system.  
Button Function  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
Detected change of a speed limit  
with immediate effect.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
the detected speed limit can be  
applied with the SET button.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied manually  
for the active driver assistance system.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. "Speed limits"  
When the SET icon lights up, press the  
button.  
7. Select the desired setting:  
231  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Adapt to route  
Principle  
The system can be configured so that the vehi‐  
cle adapts the speed automatically to the route.  
Steering Assistant  
Principle  
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle in  
the lane. For this purpose, the system executes  
supporting steering movements, for instance  
when driving in a curve.  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the  
following situations, if necessary:  
▷ Before making turns.  
▷ Before a roundabout.  
▷ Before a curve.  
General information  
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐  
self according to the lane markings or vehicles in  
front.  
Adjustment  
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
Safety information  
Warning  
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust  
speed to route"  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for  
the Active Cruise Control ACC.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system may not respond at all or with limitations  
to the route when the navigation system is un‐  
able to clearly identify the position of the vehicle.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Additional information:  
▷ System limits of Speed Limit Information, re‐  
fer to page 167.  
Steering and traffic jam assistant incl.  
Traffic Jam Assistant on/off.  
▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 35.  
Switch function on.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
232  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.  
▷ Front radar sensor.  
Set function  
When the system is active, press the  
button repeatedly until the desired func‐  
tion is selected in the toolbar. The toolbar for As‐  
sisted Driving mode is displayed at the bottom of  
the instrument cluster.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Icon Function  
Functional requirements  
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.  
▷ Sufficient lane width.  
Cruise control with distance control.  
Depending on the equipment version,  
cruise control with distance control and  
steering and traffic jam assistant.  
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐  
ing on both sides is detected.  
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking  
on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐  
tected.  
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.  
▷ Wide curves.  
The selected function is shown in green.  
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.  
▷ Turn signal switched off.  
Turning on  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
▷ The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
wheel.  
▷ Cruise control with distance control active.  
▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened.  
▷ Forward Collision Warning active.  
▷ Pedestrian Warning active.  
2.  
Adjust the steering and traffic jam  
assistant if necessary.  
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering.  
▷ Side Collision Warning active.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
Turning on/off  
Assisted Driving Mode  
General information  
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.  
The system is active.  
With the system switched on, the Pedestrian  
Warning with City Collision Mitigation and the  
side collision mitigation are active.  
This button is used to switch the config‐  
ured function on and off.  
The button can be used to set the pri‐  
marily used function.  
Turning off  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
The indicator goes out.  
233  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The system does not perform supportive steer‐  
ing wheel movements.  
Icon  
Description  
Yellow flashing steering wheel  
symbol:  
Interrupting automatically  
The system interrupts the supporting steering  
movements automatically, for example in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
Lane marking driven over.  
The steering wheel vibrates  
where applicable.  
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.  
▷ When the steering wheel is released.  
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.  
▷ When you manipulate steering.  
▷ When leaving own lane.  
Yellow steering wheel symbol  
and a signal sounds, if applica‐  
ble:  
System interruption is imminent.  
Steering wheel symbol blinks  
red, signal sounds:  
▷ When the turn signal is switched on.  
▷ When the lane is too narrow.  
System is switching off.  
▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a certain  
period of time and no vehicle is driving ahead.  
Yellow steering wheel symbol:  
The hands are not grasping the  
steering wheel. The system is  
still active.  
▷ The Active Cruise Control ACC is interrupted.  
▷ The safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐  
tened.  
Red steering wheel symbol and  
a signal sounds:  
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.  
The hands are not grasping the  
steering wheel. System interrup‐  
tion is imminent.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
The system reduces the speed  
to a standstill if applicable.  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting  
steering movements.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Alternative displays  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are  
displayed as follows:  
Gray steering wheel symbol:  
The system is on standby.  
Green steering wheel symbol:  
The system is activated.  
Icon  
Description  
The system supports the driver  
in keeping the vehicle within the  
lane.  
Gray steering wheel symbol:  
The system is on standby.  
Green steering wheel symbol:  
The system is activated.  
234  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Icon  
Description  
Depending on equipment, yel‐  
low flashing steering wheel sym‐  
bol:  
Lane marking driven over.  
The steering wheel vibrates  
where applicable.  
Yellow steering wheel symbol  
and a signal sounds, if applica‐  
ble:  
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate  
analogously to the displays in the instrument  
cluster:  
System interruption is imminent.  
Depending on equipment, steer‐  
ing wheel symbol flashes red,  
signal sounds:  
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.  
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.  
System is switching off.  
The steering wheel displays can be switched  
on/off if required.  
Green steering wheel icon and  
lane marking icon:  
1. "CAR"  
The system supports the driver  
in keeping the vehicle within the  
lane.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Light elements"  
Yellow steering wheel symbol:  
The hands are not grasping the  
steering wheel. The system is  
still active.  
Displays in the Head-up Display  
All system information can also be displayed in  
the Head-up Display.  
Red steering wheel symbol and  
a signal sounds:  
System limits  
The hands are not grasping the  
steering wheel. System interrup‐  
tion is imminent.  
General information  
The system cannot be activated or meaningfully  
used in certain situations.  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting  
steering movements.  
Safety information  
With Active Cruise Control, the  
system may reduce the speed.  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
235  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Extended Traffic Jam  
Assistant  
Principle  
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant supports the  
driver with vehicle control in traffic jam situations.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Supporting steering movements take place with‐  
out the driver actively steering.  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel  
contact in the following situations:  
General information  
The system uses the sensors of the steering and  
lane control assistant.  
▷ Driving with gloves.  
Safety information  
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
Narrow lanes  
Warning  
When driving within narrow lanes, the system  
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐  
stance in the following situations:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over  
steering and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
▷ In construction areas.  
▷ Depending on the equipment, with automatic  
formation of emergency lanes.  
▷ Within city limits.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐  
orable weather or light conditions:  
State laws differ and the use of this function may  
violate the law. Before use, check your state and  
local laws.  
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐  
ings.  
Additionally, the notices for the Steering and  
Lane Control Assistant apply.  
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are  
already recognized.  
Additional information:  
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic  
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐  
stance by braking, steering or evading.  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The functional requirements of the steering  
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled.  
Functional requirements, refer to page 233.  
▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐  
tive.  
236  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ The function is only available on certain street  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
types, e.g. freeways.  
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐  
clists.  
Icon  
Description  
▷ Sufficient lane width.  
Indicator light green: system is  
active.  
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead  
are detected.  
Indicator light white: system is  
ready.  
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.  
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐  
ment cluster detects that the driver is paying  
attention to the traffic.  
Gray indicator light: the system  
has been interrupted.  
▷ The function must be available in the country  
in which the vehicle is driven.  
Alternative displays  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are  
displayed as follows:  
Turning on  
As soon as all functional requirements  
are met, Extended Traffic Jam Assistant  
will be displayed as an additional icon in  
the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at  
the bottom of the instrument cluster.  
Indicator  
light  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is  
active.  
Select Extended Traffic Jam Assistant  
with the button on the steering wheel.  
The icon for Extended Traffic Jam Assistant is  
shown in green.  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is  
shown in green.  
The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐  
cle control.  
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate  
analogously to the displays in the instrument  
cluster:  
▷ Green: the system is active.  
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted.  
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.  
237  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Safety information  
General information  
The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐  
sistant system apply.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Additional information:  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Driver Attention Camera  
Always monitor the traffic conditions.  
The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or  
not the driver is paying attention to the traffic  
conditions.  
Additionally, the notices for the Steering and  
Lane Control Assistant apply.  
Additional information:  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
functional in the following situations:  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered  
by the steering wheel.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The functional requirements of the steering  
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled.  
▷ With sunglasses with high protection from in‐  
frared light.  
Functional requirements, refer to page 233.  
Depending on the  
equipment version:  
Automatic Lane Change  
Assistant  
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐  
clists and with physical barriers to oncoming  
traffic, such as crash barriers.  
▷ Lane markings have been detected.  
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.  
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.  
Principle  
Switch lane change assist on/off  
1. "CAR"  
The system additionally supports the driver when  
changing lanes on multilane roads.  
2. "Settings"  
General information  
The system uses the sensors of the steering and  
lane control assistant.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Steering Assistance"  
6. "Automatic Lane Change"  
238  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Changing lanes  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Icon  
Description  
2. Press the turn signal lever in the required di‐  
rection to the pressure point for signaling  
briefly.  
Green steering wheel symbol.  
Green arrow symbol for lane-  
changing.  
A supporting steering movement in the re‐  
quired direction can be detected a short time  
later.  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
Green steering wheel symbol.  
Gray line for lane marking on the  
appropriate side.  
The system detected the lane  
change request. Lane change  
not currently possible.  
Depending on country specifica‐  
tions:  
After the lane change, the system helps keep the  
vehicle in the new lane.  
Green steering wheel symbol.  
Gray arrow symbol for lane-  
changing.  
Canceling a lane change  
The lane change can be canceled by steering  
movement into the opposite direction.  
Lane change not possible; func‐  
tional requirements not met.  
Alternative displays  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are  
displayed as follows:  
239  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Description  
Depending on the  
equipment version: lane  
change with active  
guidance  
Green steering wheel symbol.  
Gray line for lane marking on the  
appropriate side.  
Green arrow symbol for lane-  
changing.  
Principle  
The system assists the driver when lane  
changes are necessary to reach a navigation  
destination.  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
Green steering wheel symbol.  
Gray line for lane marking on the  
appropriate side.  
General information  
The system uses the sensors of the steering and  
lane control assistant.  
No arrow symbol for lane-  
changing on the display.  
The system detected the lane  
change request. Lane change  
not currently possible.  
Safety information  
Depending on country specifica‐  
tions:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Green steering wheel symbol.  
Gray line for lane marking on the  
appropriate side.  
Gray arrow symbol for lane-  
changing.  
Lane change not possible; func‐  
tional requirements not met.  
Additionally, the notices for the Active Cruise  
Control and the Steering and Lane Control As‐  
sistant apply.  
System limits  
The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐  
sistant system apply.  
Additional information:  
▷ Active Cruise Control, refer to page 222.  
Additional information:  
▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to  
page 232.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Active Cruise Control is activated.  
▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
▷ Lane markings on the side of the desired lane  
change detected.  
▷ Navigation system: guidance is activated.  
240  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Adaptation to the course of the route is acti‐  
vated.  
Turn on adaptation to the course  
of the route  
▷ The function must be available in the country  
in which the vehicle is driven.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
Changing lanes  
1. One or more lane changes are required to  
reach a navigation destination.  
The system prepares for this lane change.  
For this purpose, the system determines a  
suitable opening in the traffic flow on the next  
lane.  
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust  
speed to route"  
System limits  
2. When a gap is detected, the speed is  
adapted so that the vehicle remains at the  
level of the opening.  
The limits of the Active Cruise Control and  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant systems ap‐  
ply.  
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane  
change suggestion.  
Parking assistance  
systems  
When Steering Assistant is active, a steering  
intervention in the direction of the relevant  
lane may occur.  
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane  
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into  
the next lane.  
Principle  
The parking assistance systems support the  
driver in parking and maneuvering.  
When equipped with Automatic Lane Change  
Assistant: after the Check Control message  
has been displayed, the Automatic Lane  
Change Assistant can be started by operating  
the turn signal.  
General information  
The parking assistance systems comprise the  
following individual systems.  
Additional information:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 242.  
Icon Function  
▷ Depending on equipment version: emer‐  
gency brake function, Active PDC, refer to  
page 245.  
The suggestion for the lane change is  
displayed and a green checkmark indi‐  
cates the active function.  
▷ Side parking aid, refer to page 245.  
▷ Without Surround View: rearview camera, re‐  
fer to page 246.  
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐  
ket version, the traffic situation is displayed in the  
Assisted Driving View of the instrument cluster.  
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 249.  
Additional information:  
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, driving out of  
parking space, refer to page 253.  
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 154.  
▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 254.  
241  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Surround View with rearview camera, refer to  
page 256.  
Warning  
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 261.  
▷ Remote 3D View, refer to page 263.  
▷ Remote Control Parking, refer to page 264.  
▷ Cross traffic warning, refer to page 267.  
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
PDC Park Distance Control  
Overview  
Principle  
Park Distance Control (PDC) helps with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles in  
front of or behind the vehicle.  
Button in the vehicle  
Depending on the equipment version: obstacles  
that are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors  
may also be reported by the side protection.  
General information  
The range of the system, depending on obsta‐  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
Park assistance button  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
Sensors  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐  
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.  
Safety information  
▷ Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic sen‐  
sors on the side.  
Additional information:  
Warning  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Turning on/off  
Turning on automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
242  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when  
Warning  
the engine is running.  
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while  
approaching detected obstacles at a speed  
slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The ac‐  
tivation distance depends on the situation in  
question.  
Signal tones  
General information  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is  
detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a signal  
tone sounds from the rear left speaker.  
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐  
stacles are detected on and off.  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation"  
6. "Automatic PDC Activation"  
When there are objects in front of and behind the  
vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating constant  
tone will sound.  
Depending on equipment, an additional camera  
view is also switched on.  
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone  
and constant tone are switched off if the selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
Automatic deactivation during  
forward travel  
The system switches off when a certain driving  
distance or speed is exceeded.  
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
Volume  
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.  
Switching on/off manually  
1. "CAR"  
Press the park assistance button.  
2. "Settings"  
▷ On: the LED lights up.  
▷ Off: the LED goes out.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Volume PDC signal"  
6. Set the desired value.  
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐  
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park  
assistance button.  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐  
tem cannot be switched off manually if the re‐  
verse gear is engaged.  
243  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
Visual warning  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.  
Limits of ultrasonic measurement  
The approach of the vehicle to an object is  
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are  
farther away are already displayed on the Control  
Display before a signal sounds.  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the  
following situations:  
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.  
The range of the sensors is represented in the  
colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are  
detected.  
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can move into the blind area of the  
sensors before or after a continuous tone  
sounds.  
Lanes are faded in for better estimation of the re‐  
quired space.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar‐  
ranted warnings.  
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐  
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a  
different view with obstacle markings as needed:  
To prevent unwarranted alarms, switch off auto‐  
matic Park Distance Control PDC activation on  
obstacle detection, for instance in automatic car  
washes.  
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.  
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"  
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip‐  
ment, it is warned in the PDC display against ve‐  
hicles approaching in the front or rear from the  
side.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Additional information:  
White icon is displayed, and the range of  
the sensors is dimmed on the Control  
Display.  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 267.  
System limits  
PDC Park Distance Control malfunction. Have  
the system checked by a dealer's service center  
or another qualified service center or repair shop.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
244  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Depending on equipment  
version: emergency brake  
function, Active PDC  
Additional information:  
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 242.  
Principle  
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates  
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of  
collision.  
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 249.  
Temporary switching off  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐  
vented under all circumstances.  
The emergency brake function can be switched  
off temporarily:  
Confirm the message on the Control Display.  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
During continued driving in this surrounding sit‐  
uation, no further emergency braking will occur.  
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention.  
Settings  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will  
be protected by the system.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐  
ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with  
caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐  
erator pedal and release as needed.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the  
vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at  
any time.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the  
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐  
sistant.  
System limits  
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance  
Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive  
where applicable.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
With Parking Assistant:  
side parking aid  
Principle  
The side protection warns of obstacles on the  
side of the vehicle.  
245  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
   
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐  
General information  
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the  
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐  
sistant.  
stacles.  
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles  
were detected.  
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the  
vehicle was not yet captured.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Limits of the side parking aid  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
The system does not detect whether an obstacle  
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the  
markings are shown in black after a certain time.  
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐  
tured.  
Additionally, the limits of the systems of the Park  
Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant  
apply.  
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Additional information:  
Without Surround View:  
rearview camera  
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 242.  
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 249.  
Principle  
The rearview camera provides assistance in  
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area  
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Display  
Additionally, assistance functions can be shown  
in the display, e.g., help lines.  
Safety information  
Warning  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐  
cle.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
246  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the vehicle  
equipment: switching on/off  
manually  
Press the park assistance button.  
Overview  
▷ On: the LED lights up.  
▷ Off: the LED goes out.  
Depending on the vehicle  
equipment: button in the vehicle  
The parking assistance functions are shown on  
the Control Display.  
Switching the view via iDrive  
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,  
change the view via iDrive:  
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.  
2.  
"Rear view camera"  
The rearview camera image is displayed.  
Park assistance button  
Functional requirements  
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera  
open. Protruding cargo, roof rack systems or  
trailers can limit the detection range of the  
camera.  
▷ Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Display on the Control Display  
Toolbars  
Turning on/off  
The assistance functions can be activated man‐  
ually via the toolbars on the sides of the Control  
Display.  
Turning on automatically  
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐  
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine  
is running.  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
2. With corresponding equipment:  
"Camera image"  
Automatic deactivation during  
forward travel  
3.  
▷
"Parking aid lines".  
The system switches off when a certain driving  
distance or speed is exceeded.  
Pathway lines and turning circle lines are  
displayed.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
▷
"Obstacle mark.".  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance  
Control are displayed by markings.  
247  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
More than one assistance function can be active  
at the same time.  
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
Parking aid lines  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green lane covers the corresponding  
turning circle line.  
Lanes  
Obstacle marking  
Lanes help you to estimate the space required  
when parking and maneuvering on level roads.  
Lanes depend on the steering angle and are  
continuously adjusted to the steering wheel  
movements.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles  
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park  
Distance Control sensors.  
Turning circle lines  
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image  
of the rearview camera.  
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings  
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance  
Control.  
Setting brightness and contrast  
With the rearview camera switched on:  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on  
the camera image together with lanes.  
2.  
"Camera image"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Turning circle lines show the course of the small‐  
est possible turning radius on a level road.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after the  
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.  
248  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel  
parking.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ When parking in reverse perpendicular to the  
road, perpendicular parking. The system ori‐  
ents itself with the middle of the parking  
space.  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when  
driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
Deactivated camera  
When the camera is deactivated, for instance  
when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is  
displayed hatched in gray.  
General information  
Handling  
Automatic Parking Assistant handling is divided  
into three steps:  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
▷ Switching on and activating.  
▷ Parking space search.  
▷ Parking.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐  
sistance functions also consider data from the  
PDC Park Distance Control.  
System status and instructions on required ac‐  
tions are displayed on the Control Display.  
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐  
trol chapter.  
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on  
both sides of the vehicle.  
The objects displayed on the Control Display  
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate  
the distance from the objects on the display.  
Steptronic transmission  
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates the  
best possible parking line and takes control of  
the following functions during the parking opera‐  
tion:  
With Parking Assistant:  
Parking Assistant  
▷ Steering.  
Principle  
▷ Accelerating and braking.  
▷ Changing gears.  
The parking operation is automatic.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the  
driver in the following situations:  
249  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Functional requirements  
For the measurement od parking  
spaces  
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.  
22 mph/35 km/h.  
NOTICE  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:  
5 ft/1.5 m.  
Suitable parking space  
General information:  
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance  
Control apply in addition.  
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length  
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.  
Additional information:  
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum  
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.  
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 242.  
Parallel parking to the road:  
Overview  
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: own  
vehicle length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
Button in the vehicle  
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle width  
plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must  
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical  
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐  
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.  
Park assistance button  
For the parking operation  
▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.  
Steptronic transmission:  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.  
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.  
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Switching on with the button  
Press the park assistance button.  
The LED lights up.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
The current status of the parking space search is  
indicated on the Control Display.  
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated au‐  
tomatically.  
250  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
Parking assistant is activated and parking  
space search is active.  
Switching on with reverse gear  
1. Shift into reverse.  
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking  
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐  
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active,  
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and  
an acoustic signal sounds.  
The current status of the parking space  
search is indicated on the Control Display.  
2. If necessary, activate:  
"Autom. Parking"  
Switching on via iDrive  
Display of the rearview camera or PDC view  
must be active.  
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly  
detected, the system automatically adjusts  
the suitable parking method. In the case of  
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐  
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In  
this case, the desired parking method must  
be selected manually.  
1. Move the Controller to the right.  
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control  
Display:  
"Autom. Parking"  
▷
The parking operation is active. The sys‐  
tem takes over the steering.  
Display on the Control Display  
System activated/deactivated  
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐  
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and  
straight, even if the system is deactivated.  
When the system is deactivated, the displays  
on the Control Display are shown in gray.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Gray: the system is not available.  
White: the system is available but not  
activated.  
Switching signal tone for  
suitable parking spaces on/off  
1. "CAR"  
System is activated.  
Parking space search is active.  
2. "Settings"  
The parking operation is active. The  
system takes over the steering.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Automatic Parking"  
Parking space search and system  
status  
6. "Alert if parking space detected"  
Signal tones of the PDC Park  
Distance Control  
During an automatic parking operation, no inter‐  
mittent tone will sound from the PDC Park Dis‐  
tance Control.  
A continuous tone sounds when the distance to  
a detected object is less than approx. 8 in‐  
ches/20 cm.  
251  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or  
takes over steering.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.  
Parking  
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome, such as curbs.  
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐  
tant.  
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐  
pear.  
For this, engage the reverse gear or press the  
parking assist button and activate the system  
on the Control Display, if needed.  
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays  
clearances that are too small.  
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.  
▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐  
ceeded.  
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles forward at a  
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and  
at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.  
▷ When changing over to another function on  
the Control Display.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on the  
Control Display.  
Steptronic transmission:  
▷ If the trunk lid is open.  
▷ If doors are open.  
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the  
parking operation: select the parking space  
on the Control Display.  
▷ When setting the parking brake.  
▷ During acceleration.  
The system takes over the steering.  
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an  
extended period while the vehicle is station‐  
ary.  
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Steptronic transmission:  
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
At the end of the parking operation, the P se‐  
lector lever position is set.  
The end of the parking operation is indicated  
on the Control Display.  
Resuming  
An interrupted parking operation can be contin‐  
ued, if needed.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the  
instructions on the Control Display.  
Interrupting manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter‐  
rupted at any time:  
Turning off  
The system can be switched off manually:  
▷
Press the park assistance button.  
Press the park assistance button.  
▷
"Autom. Parking": select the icon on the  
Control Display.  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is interrupted automatically in the  
following situations:  
252  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
System limits  
Safety information  
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be  
detected or suitable parking spaces may not  
be detected at all.  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc‐  
tioned. Have the system checked by a dealer's  
service center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Depending on the  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer  
assistance in the following situations:  
equipment version: driving  
out of a parking space  
using the parking assistant  
▷ In tight curves.  
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.  
Principle  
The system makes driving out of parallel parking  
spaces easier.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.  
General information  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
Steptronic transmission  
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line  
for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐  
trol of the following functions during the maneu‐  
ver:  
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
▷ On slippery ground.  
▷ Steering.  
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
▷ Accelerating and braking.  
▷ Changing gears.  
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the  
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can  
drive out of the parking space without further  
steering movements.  
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.  
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
253  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
4. On the Control Display, confirm the required  
Safety information  
direction for driving out of the parking space if  
necessary.  
Warning  
5. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Steptronic transmission:  
The system takes control of the maneuver. A  
message will be displayed at the end of the  
maneuver.  
6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of the parking space and drive off  
as usual.  
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is switched  
off automatically.  
Additional information:  
System limits  
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance  
Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.  
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 242.  
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 249.  
With Parking Assistant:  
Reversing Assistant  
Functional requirements  
▷ The vehicle was parked manually and objects  
in front of and behind the car are detected.  
The distance to a detected curb is at least  
6 inches/15 cm.  
Principle  
The Back-up Assistant supports the driver when  
driving in reverse, for instance when driving out  
of tight or confusing parking or street situations.  
▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking as‐  
sistant and an object is detected in front of  
the vehicle.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the  
last route. This stored route can be driven back  
with automated steering.  
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐  
ger than your vehicle.  
▷ The vehicle has been parked in reverse.  
General information  
The system takes control of the steering when  
driving in reverse along the stored route.  
Driving out of parking spaces  
1. Turn on drive readiness.  
The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐  
erator pedal and brake.  
2. Steptronic transmission:  
Press the park assistance button or shift into  
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to  
switch on the Automatic Parking Assistant.  
The Reversing Assistant uses the control ele‐  
ments and sensors of the PDC Park Distance  
Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right and activate the  
Automatic Parking Assistant on the Control  
Additional information:  
Display:  
"Autom. Parking"  
254  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 242.  
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display  
where required.  
▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 249.  
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal  
and the brake.  
Safety information  
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the  
vehicle's surroundings, and if you encounter  
an obstacle, stop immediately and take over  
control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions  
on the PDC Park Distance Control.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is  
reached and take control of the vehicle, such  
as by shifting to a forward gear.  
At the end of the stored route, a signal will  
sound and a request will be displayed, also  
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐  
hicle.  
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Terminating the system  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
Additional information:  
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 242.  
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or  
takes over steering.  
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 249.  
▷ When engaging a forward gear.  
▷ During activation or intervention by driving  
control systems or assist systems.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the  
route.  
▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored.  
▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐  
versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐  
ing angle.  
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving  
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h.  
▷ When the display on the Control Display is  
cross-faded with messages, e.g., due to in‐  
coming calls.  
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated.  
Driving back with automated  
steering  
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into  
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary  
and the drive-ready state is switched on.  
System limits  
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you  
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle.  
2. Move the Controller to the right.  
3. "Back-up Assistant"  
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is  
limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.  
The system takes over the steering.  
255  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning  
is issued and the function may be canceled.  
▷ Unobstructed camera perspective, movable  
via iDrive.  
▷ After driving a stored distance with major  
steering-wheel angles, the function of the  
system will be limited for the return trip.  
▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic, for  
instance at junctions and driveways, depend‐  
ing on the currently engaged gear.  
▷ Additionally, the limits of the systems of the  
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround‐  
ings or a part of it is depicted.  
Additionally, assistance functions are shown in  
the display, e.g., help lines.  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving back on the stored route. For exam‐  
ple, this includes the following factors:  
More than one assistance function can be active  
at the same time.  
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary while storing the distance covered.  
Some assistance functions can be manually acti‐  
vated.  
▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance  
traveled.  
The following assistance functions are automati‐  
cally displayed:  
▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients or in‐  
clines.  
▷ Side parking aid.  
▷ Door opening angle.  
Safety information  
With Parking Assistant  
Plus: Surround View  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Principle  
Surround View supports the driver in parking and  
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is  
shown on the Control Display.  
General information  
Several cameras capture the area from different  
selectable perspectives.  
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐  
played:  
Overview  
▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system  
shows the camera perspective suitable for  
the respective driving situation.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
▷ Rearview camera: for representing the areas  
behind the vehicle.  
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view: for repre‐  
senting the areas on the sides of the vehicle.  
256  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Park assistance button  
Panorama View  
Display on the Control Display  
Overview  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Front camera.  
▷ Top view cameras.  
▷ Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Toolbar, left  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Camera image  
Side view  
Turning on/off  
Automatic camera perspective  
Movable unobstructed camera perspective  
Toolbar, right  
Turning on automatically  
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐  
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine  
is running.  
Rearview camera  
Selection window  
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐  
tive driving situation is displayed.  
Toolbar on the left  
Additional information:  
The left toolbar can be used for the direct selec‐  
tion of various views via iDrive. Move the Control‐  
ler to the left, if needed.  
Park Distance Control, turn on/off, refer to  
page 242.  
▷
▷
▷
"Parking": around the vehicle.  
"3D view": available camera.  
"Car wash".  
Switching on/off manually  
Press the park assistance button.  
▷ On: the LED lights up.  
▷ Off: the LED goes out.  
Side view  
The side view can be selected for the right or left  
vehicle side.  
Depending on the equipment version, the rear‐  
view camera cannot be switched off when the  
reverse gear is engaged.  
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at  
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by  
displaying the side surroundings.  
Automatic deactivation during  
forward travel  
The system switches off when a certain driving  
distance or speed is exceeded.  
The side view looks from rear to front and in case  
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐  
stacles.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
257  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Parking aid lines".  
Automatic camera perspective  
"Obstacle mark.".  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐  
ing direction.  
▷
"Settings": apply settings, for instance to  
use the activation points for Panorama View.  
This perspective adapts to the respective driving  
situation.  
Rearview camera  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or  
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,  
changes to a side view.  
This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐  
era.  
Selection window  
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic  
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and  
the system uses a fixed perspective of the rear‐  
view camera. If necessary, manually select the  
automatic camera perspective when reverse  
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per‐  
spective will be retained for the current parking  
operation.  
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐  
lected in the selection window via iDrive.  
Parking aid lines  
Lanes  
Movable unobstructed camera  
perspective  
With selection of the movable camera perspec‐  
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.  
By turning the Controller or via touch function,  
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐  
lected.  
Lanes help you to estimate the space required  
when parking and maneuvering on level roads.  
The current perspective is marked with a camera  
symbol.  
Lanes depend on the steering angle and are  
continuously adjusted to the steering wheel  
movements.  
To leave the function, move the Controller side‐  
ways and select another camera function.  
Toolbar on the right  
Turning circle lines  
Assistance functions can be activated and set‐  
tings can be entered via the right toolbar via  
iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
▷
▷
▷
"Autom. Parking".  
"Back-up Assistant".  
"Camera image":  
"Brightness".  
▷
▷
"Contrast".  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on  
the camera image together with lanes.  
258  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Turning circle lines show the course of the small‐  
est possible turning radius on a level road.  
Car wash view  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after the  
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.  
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green lane covers the corresponding  
turning circle line.  
The car wash view assists when entering a car  
wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's  
own track.  
Obstacle marking  
Side parking aid  
Principle  
The system warns of obstacles on the side of  
the vehicle.  
Display  
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the  
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.  
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera  
image.  
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings  
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance  
Control.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐  
cle.  
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.  
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐  
stacles.  
Limits of the side parking aid  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
259  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The system does not detect whether an obstacle  
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the  
markings are not shown anymore in the display  
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle  
must be newly captured.  
Setting brightness and contrast  
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with  
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
2.  
"Camera image"  
Door opening angle  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Principle  
Functional limitations  
The system can be used only to a limited extent  
in the following situations:  
If obstacle marking is activated, the Surround  
View indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the  
opening angles of the doors.  
▷ In poor light.  
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐  
proaching road users.  
▷ In case of soiled cameras.  
▷ With a door open.  
Display  
▷ With the trunk lid open.  
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.  
Gray hatched areas with icon, for instance open  
door, in the camera image mark areas that are  
currently not displayed.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Steptronic transmission: the maximum opening  
angles of the doors are displayed in selector  
lever position P. As soon as the vehicle begins  
moving, the opening angles are replaced by  
parking aid lines.  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Non-visible areas  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
Limits of the display  
Detection of objects  
The vehicle's surroundings are displayed with  
distorted image for technical reasons.  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
Even if the symbols for the door opening angles  
do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐  
play, the following needs to be noted when park‐  
ing next to other objects:  
Some assistance functions also consider data  
from the PDC Park Distance Control.  
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding  
objects may be closer than they appear on the  
Control Display.  
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐  
trol chapter.  
The objects displayed on the Control Display  
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate  
the distance from the objects on the display.  
260  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Depending on the equipment version, the func‐  
tion can only be used when driving forward.  
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 242.  
Additional information:  
Malfunction  
Surround View, refer to page 256.  
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control  
Display.  
Safety information  
A yellow icon is displayed and the re‐  
cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐  
era is displayed in black on the Control  
Display.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐  
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic  
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
With Parking Assistant  
Plus: Panorama View  
Principle  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Panorama View gives you an earlier view of  
crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and inter‐  
sections.  
Panorama View  
General information  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left  
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐  
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in  
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic  
area to improve the view.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
▷ Front camera.  
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front  
and rear end of the vehicle.  
▷ Depending on the equipment: rearview cam‐  
era.  
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐  
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for  
distance estimations.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
261  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Using activation points  
Display on the Control Display  
The use of activation points can be switched on  
and off.  
Press the button when the engine is run‐  
ning.  
Depending on the driving direction, the image of  
the respective camera is displayed:  
1.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3. "Settings"  
Press the button.  
▷ "Front": front camera image.  
▷ "Rear": rear camera image.  
4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐  
fic warning can additionally warn of approaching  
vehicles using radar sensors.  
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically  
when set activation points are reached."  
Additional information:  
Displaying activation points  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 267.  
1.  
Press the button.  
With navigation system:  
activation points  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3.  
"Manage points"  
A list of all activation points is displayed.  
Principle  
Positions where Panorama View should switch  
on automatically can be stored as activation  
points provided that a Global Positioning System  
signal is received.  
Renaming or deleting activation  
points  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
General information  
Up to ten activation points can be stored.  
3.  
"Manage points"  
A list of all activation points is displayed.  
Activation points can be used when driving for‐  
ward for the front camera.  
4. Select an activation point as needed.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Storing activation points  
1. Drive to the position at which the system is to  
be switched on, and stop.  
Functional limitations  
The Surround View functional limitations apply.  
Additional information:  
2.  
Press the button.  
Surround View, refer to page 256.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Activation point"  
System limits  
The limits of the Surround View system apply.  
The current position is displayed.  
5. "Save activation point"  
Additional information:  
Activation points are, if possible, stored with  
town/city and street address, or else with the  
Global Positioning System coordinates.  
Surround View, refer to page 256.  
262  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Switching on/off individually  
With Parking Assistant  
Plus: Remote 3D View  
Pre-adjustment  
1. "CAR"  
Principle  
2. "Settings"  
The BMW app and the pictures of the Surround  
View cameras in combination with the corre‐  
sponding equipment enable the display of the  
vehicle’s surroundings on a mobile device.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. "Select services individually"  
6. "My BMW app & customer portal"  
7. "Remote 3D View"  
The function displays a momentary view of the  
situation.  
Turning on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
2. "Settings"  
▷ Front camera.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. "Individual selection"  
▷ Top view cameras.  
▷ Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Data transmission must be activated.  
Data protection, refer to page 66.  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional or may  
not be available in the following situations:  
▷ BMW app must be installed on the mobile  
device.  
▷ With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields  
in the display indicate areas that are not re‐  
corded by the system.  
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile  
with an existing ConnectedDrive account  
must be activated.  
▷ With manually folded in exterior mirrors.  
Driver profiles, refer to page 67.  
▷ When other camera functions are being per‐  
formed in the vehicle.  
Switching the function on/off  
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
Switching on/off with other  
functions  
1. "CAR"  
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in  
every country.  
2. "Settings"  
▷ For reasons of data protection, the function  
can only be used three times within two  
hours.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
263  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
fic and parking situation closely and actively in‐  
tervene where appropriate.  
Remote Control Parking  
Principle  
The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven  
out in reverse in the case of suitable forward-  
parking spaces, for instance a garage. The driver  
controls the parking operation responsibly from  
the outside using the BMW display key.  
Warning  
Unauthorized persons, for instance children,  
can move the vehicle using the BMW display  
key without anybody in the vehicle. There is a  
risk of accident. Protect the BMW display key  
against unauthorized use.  
Stop the vehicles manually in the case of obsta‐  
cles.  
General information  
NOTICE  
The following systems are included in the sys‐  
tem:  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
▷ Parking assistant.  
▷ BMW display key.  
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.  
Using the BMW display key, the vehicle can be  
moved by approx. 2 times the vehicle length.  
The speed is approx. 1.1 mph/1.8 km/h.  
Overview  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
Button on the BMW display key: the button on  
the side of the BMW display key must be  
pressed and held for the duration of the parking  
operation so that the vehicle can move. Release  
the button for obstacles to manually stop the ve‐  
hicle. The vehicle stops with emergency braking.  
▷ Front camera.  
▷ Top view cameras.  
▷ Rearview camera.  
If the ultrasound sensors detect obstacles in the  
parking space or the end of the parking space,  
the system automatically stops the vehicle as  
needed.  
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.  
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
More information: sensors of the vehicle, refer to  
page 35.  
The headlight is switched on for the duration of  
the procedure.  
Functional requirements  
General information  
There are no occupants in the vehicle during the  
parking procedure.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing traffic  
and parking situation. Based on the limits of the  
system, it cannot independently react to all sit‐  
uations. There is a risk of accident. Watch traf‐  
Driver interventions in the vehicle's interior,  
such as steering, will cancel the function.  
264  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Cameras and ultrasound sensors  
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐  
ers.  
Forward parking  
Parking  
While driving forward, the system applies minor  
steering corrections as needed.  
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed. Clean  
them as needed.  
▷ Keep camera lenses clean and unobstructed.  
Clean them as needed.  
1. Approach the parking space driving forward,  
as straight and centered as possible and with  
a maximum distance of 6.5 ft/2 m.  
Suitable parking space  
2. Engage selector lever position P and set the  
parking brake. Switch off the drive-ready  
state and engine using the Start/Stop button.  
Alternatively, the engine can continue to run.  
3. All the occupants leave the vehicle. Closing  
the doors.  
4. If necessary, switch on the display on the  
BMW display key and cancel the display lock.  
On the BMW display key, change to the  
menu: "R/C parking"  
▷ It is possible to forward-park into the parking  
space in a straight, centered line.  
BMW display key, refer to page 85.  
5.  
Press and hold the button on the side of  
the BMW display key for the duration of the  
parking operation.  
▷ Width of the parking space: own vehicle width  
without exterior mirrors, plus approx.  
1.3 ft/0.4 m on each side, arrow 1.  
6. Wait, until operational readiness is indicated  
on the display. Observe possible text mes‐  
sages.  
▷ Distance to parking space, max. 6.5 ft/2 m, ar‐  
row 2.  
▷ To move the vehicle with remote control, the  
driver must hold the BMW display key within  
the wireless range, arrow 3, outside the vehi‐  
cle.  
7. "ENGINE START": tap the button to start the  
engine if necessary.  
8. To start the parking operation: touch the ar‐  
row symbol for "drive forward" on the display.  
Maximum distance to vehicle approx.  
5 ft/1.5 m to approx. 10 ft/3 m.  
Press and hold the button: the vehicle  
moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐  
lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐  
ing range to stop the vehicle.  
▷ Uphill or downhill grades max. 5 %.  
▷ No duplex garages.  
For approach movements: touch the arrow  
symbol for "drive backward".  
9. At the end of the parking operation, release  
the button on the side of the BMW display  
key. The vehicle stops.  
"ENGINE STOP": tap the button.  
▷ The parking brake is set.  
▷ The engine is switched off.  
265  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Lock the vehicle with the BMW display key.  
8. At the end of the reversing out operation, re‐  
lease the button on the side of the BMW dis‐  
play key. The vehicle stops.  
Cancel, pause, continue the parking  
operation  
Cancel or interrupt the parking operation:  
9. Enter using the BMW display key and drive  
off as normal.  
Alternatively, the vehicle can be switched off  
using the BMW display key:  
Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐  
gency braking.  
"ENGINE STOP": tap the button.  
▷ The parking brake is set.  
▷ The engine is switched off.  
Continue the parking operation:  
Press button again. Observe possible text  
messages.  
Lock the vehicle with the BMW display key,  
where applicable.  
Driving out in reverse  
Driving out of parking spaces  
When driving in reverse, the vehicle drives back‐  
ward in a straight line without steering.  
Cancel, pause, continue the parking  
operation  
Cancel or interrupt the parking operation:  
1. If necessary, switch on the display on the  
BMW display key and cancel the display lock.  
Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐  
gency braking.  
BMW display key, refer to page 85.  
2. Unlock the vehicle.  
Continue the parking operation:  
Press button again. Observe possible text  
messages.  
3. On the BMW display key, change to the  
menu: "R/C parking"  
Messages on the BMW display  
key  
4.  
Press and hold the button on the side of  
the BMW display key for the duration of the  
parking operation.  
The icon identifies system messages.  
5. Wait, until operational readiness is indicated  
on the display. Observe possible text mes‐  
sages.  
System limits  
6. "ENGINE START": tap the button. The en‐  
gine starts.  
Safety information  
7. To start the reversing out operation: touch  
the arrow icon for "drive backward" on the  
display.  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Press and hold the button: the vehicle  
moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐  
lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐  
ing range to stop the vehicle.  
266  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
No parking assistance  
Limits of ultrasonic measurement  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer  
assistance in the following situations:  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐  
urements can run into physical limits.  
▷ In tight curves.  
The limits of the ultrasonic measurement of the  
Park Distance Control PDC apply.  
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.  
Additional information:  
▷ At very high or very low external tempera‐  
tures.  
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 242.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Cross traffic warning  
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.  
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.  
Principle  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of per‐  
pendicular parking spaces, road users approach‐  
ing from the side are detected sooner by the  
cross traffic warning than is possible from the  
driver's seat.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
General information  
▷ On slippery ground.  
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.  
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind the vehicle.  
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be  
detected or suitable parking spaces may not  
be detected at all.  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic  
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.  
Two additional radar sensors are located in the  
front bumpers.  
Functional limitations due to radio  
interference  
In the case of radio interference, functional limita‐  
tions may occur during Remote Control Parking  
with the BMW display key.  
Additional information:  
Malfunction, refer to page 88.  
267  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Switching on/off  
Activating/deactivating the system  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
With the button  
1.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3. "Settings"  
Press the park assistance button.  
4. "Cross Traffic Warning"  
5. "Cross traffic warning"  
Overview  
Via iDrive  
Button in the vehicle  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Cross Traffic Warning"  
6. "Cross traffic warning"  
Turning on automatically  
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐  
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as  
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is  
active and a gear is engaged.  
Park assistance button  
Sensors  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
The system is controlled by the following sen‐  
sors:  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front  
system is switched on when a forward gear is  
engaged.  
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sensors,  
side, front.  
Switching off automatically  
Additional information:  
The system is automatically switched off in the  
following situations:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.  
▷ With an active parking operation of the Auto‐  
matic Parking Assistant.  
268  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Display in the camera view  
Warning  
General information  
The respective display is called up on the Con‐  
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the  
light in the exterior mirror may flash.  
Light in the exterior mirror  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected  
by the sensors.  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Acoustic warning  
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles  
are detected by the rear sensors and your own  
vehicle is moving in reverse.  
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐  
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐  
spective direction.  
Display in the PDC Park Distance  
Control view  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following situa‐  
tions:  
▷ In tight curves.  
▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐  
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles  
are detected by the sensors.  
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the  
sensors, that hide cross traffic.  
269  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
depending on the equipment, the selected driv‐  
ing mode.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Additional information:  
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 138.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Adaptive Drive  
Principle  
Adaptive Drive is an actively controlled chassis.  
The system increases driving comfort and mini‐  
mizes the lateral tilt when driving around curves.  
General information  
For active control, this system uses the available  
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐  
tem or the Driving style analysis.  
Chassis components  
The chassis components are optimized for the  
vehicle and its application range and thereby en‐  
sure the best possible Driving Dynamics.  
In particular in the ADAPTIVE driving mode, this  
information is used to influence the adaptive  
chassis control and the active roll stabilization  
control. This further increases both the agility of  
the vehicle as well as the lane stability.  
Adaptive chassis  
The function may be restricted if the navigation  
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐  
ample.  
Principle  
The adaptive suspension is an intelligent control‐  
lable suspension.  
The chassis reduces body movements with a  
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.  
Active roll stabilization  
General information  
The intelligent control of the chassis increases  
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de‐  
pending on the road condition and driving style.  
Principle  
Active roll stabilization reduces the roll tendency  
of the body that occurs during rapid cornering or  
during quick evasive maneuvers.  
Tuning  
General information  
The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by  
permanent adjustment on the front and rear  
axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.  
The system offers different shock absorber set‐  
tings ranging from comfortable travel to sporty  
driving.  
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending on  
the road condition and driving style as well as,  
270  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Agility and driving comfort are increased under all  
driving conditions.  
Adaptive M Chassis  
Professional  
Tuning  
Principle  
The system offers different settings ranging from  
comfortable travel to sporty driving.  
The Adaptive M Chassis Professional is an ac‐  
tively controlled sport chassis/suspension. The  
system increases driving comfort and minimizes  
the lateral tilt when driving around curves.  
The settings are assigned to the different driving  
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control.  
Additional information:  
The Adaptive M Chassis Professional encom‐  
passes the following systems:  
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 138.  
▷ Low-lying sport chassis.  
▷ Adaptive chassis.  
Adaptive M chassis  
▷ Active roll stabilization.  
▷ Integral Active Steering.  
Principle  
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, control‐  
lable sport chassis.  
General information  
For active control, this system uses the available  
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐  
tem or the Driving style analysis.  
The chassis reduces body movements with a  
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.  
General information  
The intelligent control of the chassis increases  
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de‐  
pending on the road condition and driving style.  
This information influences the control of the fol‐  
lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving  
mode:  
▷ Adaptive chassis.  
▷ Active roll stabilization.  
▷ Integral Active Steering.  
Tuning  
The system offers different shock absorber set‐  
tings ranging from comfortable travel to sporty  
driving.  
This further increases the agility and comfort of  
the vehicle.  
The function may be restricted if the navigation  
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐  
ample.  
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending on  
the selected driving mode as well as the road  
condition and driving style.  
Additional information:  
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 138.  
Engine sound  
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐  
ket version, you may be able to configure the  
sound of the engine.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
271  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
4. "Engine sound"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
272  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Automatic climate control  
Overview  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Air quality  
Climate control functions  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
Button  
Function  
Temperature.  
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.  
▷ Interior filter.  
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐  
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.  
Air conditioning.  
▷ Pre-ventilation.  
▷ Ionizer.  
Maximum cooling.  
AUTO program.  
▷ Fragrancing.  
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control.  
Interior filter  
Depending on the equipment, the interior filter  
cleans the inflowing outside air and improves the  
air quality:  
Air recirculation mode.  
Air flow, manual.  
▷ Dust and pollen is filtered out from the inflow‐  
ing air.  
Intensity AUTO program.  
Air distribution, manual.  
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
SYNC program.  
▷ Microbial particles and allergens are filtered.  
273  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Button  
Turning off  
Function  
When equipped with automatic climate control  
with enhanced features:  
Defrost function.  
Complete system:  
Rear window defroster.  
▷ Button on the driver's side:  
Press and hold the left side of the  
button until the integrated automatic  
climate control switches off.  
Active seat ventilation, refer to  
page 127.  
Seat heating, refer to page 126.  
▷ Button on the passenger's side:  
Press and hold the left side of the  
button.  
Opening the Climate menu.  
For example, for the following  
settings: upper body tempera‐  
ture adjustment, pre-ventilation.  
Temperature  
Principle  
Some of the functions can also be used via  
voice, e.g., temperature.  
The automatic climate control cools or heats to  
the configured temperature and then keeps the  
temperature constant.  
Opening the Climate menu  
Setting the temperature  
Press the button.  
Turning the wheel clockwise or  
counter-clockwise: lowering or  
raising the temperature.  
The Climate menu is displayed.  
All the climate control functions which can ad‐  
justed via iDrive can be called up via the Climate  
menu, e.g., upper body temperature adjustment,  
pre-ventilation.  
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐  
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate  
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the  
set temperature.  
Switching climate control  
functions on/off  
Temperature of the ventilation  
General information  
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper  
body region can be adjusted.  
Turning on  
Press one of the following buttons:  
▷ Air conditioning.  
▷ Maximum cooling.  
▷ AUTO program.  
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body  
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on  
the adjusted temperature.  
▷ Air recirculation mode.  
▷ Right side of the air flow, manual button.  
▷ Air distribution, manual.  
▷ Defrosting the windshield  
▷ Fragrancing.  
This does not change the set interior tempera‐  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
274  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjust temperature of the  
ventilation  
1. "CAR"  
Functional requirement  
The function is available with outside tempera‐  
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Temperature adjustment"  
6. Set the desired temperature.  
Switching maximum cooling on/off  
Press the button.  
The LED is illuminated when maximum  
cooling is switched on.  
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.  
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
region. The air vents need to be open for this.  
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐  
gram active.  
Air conditioning  
Principle  
AUTO program  
Principle  
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐  
humidified and, depending on the temperature  
setting, warmed again.  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats  
the car's interior automatically.  
Functional requirement  
The car's interior can only be cooled with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
The air distribution and the temperature are con‐  
trolled automatically depending on the interior  
temperature and the desired temperature setting  
including the selected intensity of the air flow.  
Switch climate control function  
on/off  
Switching the AUTO program on/off  
Press the button.  
Press the button.  
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐  
tioning switched on.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
with the AUTO program switched on.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
Depending on the selected settings and outside  
influences, the air is directed to the windshield,  
side windows, upper body, and into the floor  
area.  
Air conditioning is switched on automatically with  
the AUTO program.  
Point the side air vents toward the side windows.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation that  
will exit below the vehicle.  
The cooling function is switched on with the  
AUTO program.  
Maximum cooling  
Principle  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐  
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐  
densation as much as possible.  
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐  
cally, when manual air distribution is set.  
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐  
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
275  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Controlling the intensity of the air  
flow  
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐  
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic  
control for the air mass.  
Air recirculation mode  
Principle  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants  
in the immediate environment by temporarily  
suspending the supply of outside air. The system  
then recirculates the interior air.  
Press the left or right side of the button:  
to decrease or increase intensity.  
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh  
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.  
The selected intensity is shown on the display of  
the automatic climate control.  
Switch air recirculation on/off  
Automatic recirculated-air  
control  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the air-recirculation mode is switched on.  
Principle  
The automatic recirculated-air control recognizes  
pollutants in the outside air. The outside air sup‐  
ply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated.  
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air  
mode switches off automatically after a certain  
amount of time, depending on the environmental  
conditions.  
General information  
With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐  
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐  
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off  
automatically.  
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐  
culated-air mode or defog the windows.  
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐  
ously flows into the car's interior.  
Air flow, manual  
Principle  
With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐  
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted  
manually.  
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐  
culated-air mode or defog the windows.  
Adjusting the air flow manually  
Switching automatic recirculated-air  
control on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Press the left or right side of the button:  
to decrease or increase air flow.  
2. "Settings"  
The selected air flow is shown on the display of  
the automatic climate control.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
5. "Auto-recirculate"  
The air flow of the automatic climate control may  
be reduced automatically to save battery power.  
276  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The program is switched off automatically if the  
settings on the front passenger side or in the  
rear are changed.  
Manual air distribution  
Principle  
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐  
justed manually.  
Defrost function  
Principle  
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from  
the windshield and the front side windows.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
manually  
Press the button repeatedly. Select the  
desired setting:  
Switching the Defrost function  
on/off  
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.  
▷ Upper body region and floor area.  
▷ Floor area.  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the system is switched on.  
▷ Windows and floor area.  
▷ Windows: driver's side only.  
▷ Windows and upper body region.  
▷ Upper body region.  
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the  
system switched on.  
If there is any window condensation, switch on  
the air conditioning. Make sure that air can flow  
to the windshield.  
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐  
mate control display.  
Rear window defroster  
Principle  
Ice and condensation are removed from the rear  
window quickly.  
SYNC program  
Principle  
The Sync program can be used to apply the set‐  
tings on the driver's side to the passenger's side  
and the rear.  
Functional requirement  
The function is operational when the drive-ready  
state is switched on.  
Switching the SYNC program on/off  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the SYNC program is switched on.  
Switching rear window defroster  
on/off  
Depending on the equipment, the following set‐  
tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the  
front-passenger side and the rear:  
Press the button. The LED is illumi‐  
nated with rear window defroster  
switched on.  
▷ Temperature.  
▷ Air flow.  
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐  
ically after a certain period of time.  
▷ Air distribution.  
▷ AUTO program.  
277  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Microfilter/activated-charcoal  
filter  
Front ventilation  
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the  
incoming air.  
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐  
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters  
the vehicle.  
Have this combined filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐  
row 1.  
Ventilation  
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing  
of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Principle  
The air flow directions can be adjusted individu‐  
ally for direct or indirect ventilation.  
Ventilation in rear, center  
Setting the ventilation  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective climate control.  
Direct ventilation  
The air flow is directed towards the passengers.  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending  
on the adjusted temperature.  
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐  
row 1.  
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing  
of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Indirect ventilation  
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐  
gers. The vehicle interior is warmed or cooled in‐  
directly, depending on the set temperature.  
278  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control functions  
Ventilation in the rear, on the  
side  
Button  
Function  
Temperature.  
Maximum cooling.  
AUTO program.  
Air flow, manual.  
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐  
row 1.  
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing  
of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Intensity Auto program.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Rear automatic climate  
control  
Switching climate control  
functions on/off  
Overview  
Functional requirement  
The rear automatic climate control is not ready  
for operation if the automatic climate control is  
switched off or if the function for defrosting the  
windows and removing condensation is active.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Switching on/off using iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Rear climate control"  
Switching on using the button  
Press one of the following buttons:  
▷ Maximum cooling.  
▷ AUTO program.  
▷ Right side of the air flow, manual button.  
▷ Air distribution, manual.  
279  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Switching off using the button  
AUTO program  
Principle  
Press and hold the left side of the but‐  
ton.  
The air flow, air distribution and the temperature  
are controlled automatically.  
Temperature  
Principle  
The automatic climate control cools or heats to  
the configured temperature and then keeps the  
temperature constant.  
Switching the AUTO program on/off  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
with the AUTO program switched on.  
Depending on the selected settings and outside  
influences, the air is directed to the upper body  
and into the floor area.  
Setting the temperature  
Turning wheel clockwise or coun‐  
ter-clockwise: lowering or raising  
the temperature.  
Controlling the intensity of the air  
flow  
With the AUTO program activated, the automatic  
intensity control can be changed:  
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐  
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate  
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the  
set temperature.  
Pressing the left or right side of the but‐  
ton repeatedly: decrease or increase in‐  
tensity.  
Maximum cooling  
Principle  
The selected intensity is shown on the display of  
the automatic climate control.  
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐  
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
Air flow, manual  
Principle  
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted  
manually.  
Functional requirement  
The function is available with outside tempera‐  
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
General information  
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO  
program first.  
Switching maximum cooling on/off  
Adjusting the air flow manually  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when maximum cooling is switched on.  
Pressing the left or right side of the but‐  
ton repeatedly: decrease or increase air  
flow.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
region. The air vents need to be open for this.  
The selected air flow is shown on the climate  
control display.  
280  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
Manual air distribution  
Principle  
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐  
justed manually.  
▷ Open the air vents to allow air to flow out.  
Switching on/off directly  
General information  
Adjusting the air distribution  
manually  
There are different ways to switch the system on  
or off.  
Press the button repeatedly. Select the  
desired setting:  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
▷ Upper body region.  
▷ Upper body region and floor area.  
▷ Floor area.  
Using the button  
General information  
Pre-ventilation  
When the vehicle is in standby state, the pre-  
ventilation can be switched on or off via the auto‐  
matic climate control buttons.  
Principle  
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before  
driving off with the pre-ventilation. Depending on  
set temperature and ambient temperature, the  
car's interior is ventilated or possibly heated us‐  
ing the residual engine heat.  
Turning on  
Press any button except:  
▷ Rear window defroster.  
▷ Left side of air flow button.  
▷ Seat heating.  
General information  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
▷ Seat ventilation.  
▷ SYNC program.  
▷ MENU.  
The activation time is determined based on the  
outside temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure time.  
Turning off  
Press and hold the left side of the but‐  
ton.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐  
ing the vehicle.  
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.  
Via iDrive  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle  
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the  
maximum activation time to save the vehicle  
battery. The system will be available again af‐  
ter the engine is started or after a short trip.  
Turning on  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
281  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
▷ Set departure times.  
▷ Activate departure times.  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between  
setting/activating the departure time and the  
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐  
riod of time for the climate control.  
Via BMW display key  
Turning on  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Setting the departure time  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
Via iDrive  
3. Tap the  
icon or the  
icon.  
1. "CAR"  
4. "Activate now"  
5. "Start"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Select the desired departure time.  
7. Set the departure time.  
8. Select day of the week, if needed.  
9. "OK"  
Turning off  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3. Tap the  
4. "Stop"  
icon or the  
icon.  
Display  
Via BMW display key  
icon on the automatic climate control indi‐  
cates the system is switched on.  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
REST is shown on the climate control display.  
The residual engine heat is used.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3. Tap the  
icon or the  
icon.  
4. Select the desired departure time.  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
7. "OK"  
Departure time  
Principle  
Different departure times can be set to ensure a  
comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at  
the time of departure.  
Activating the departure time  
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
Functional requirement  
To switch on the parked-car ventilation automati‐  
cally at the departure time, the departure time  
must be activated first.  
The system is switched on once.  
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week can be set.  
On the desired weekdays, the system will be  
switched on before the set departure time.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
2. "Settings"  
282  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
3. "Climate control"  
outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.  
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐  
cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐  
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐  
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Activate the desired departure time.  
Via BMW display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Warning  
When stationary climate control is in operation,  
high temperatures can occur underneath the  
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas  
system. If combustible materials, such as  
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts  
of the exhaust gas system, these materials can  
ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no  
combustible materials can come in contact with  
hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐  
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,  
oil or other combustible objects.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3. Tap the  
icon or the  
icon.  
4. Tap on the icon.  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display  
,
Symbol on the climate control display  
signals an activated departure time.  
Pre-conditioning through  
Remote Engine Start  
Functional requirements  
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
Principle  
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's interior  
prior to departure to a comfortable temperature.  
The system automatically cools, vents, and heats  
depending on the interior, external, and set tem‐  
perature. Snow and ice may be removed more  
easily.  
▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on twice consecutively. The system  
will be available again as soon as the drive-  
ready state is activated and deactivated  
again.  
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.  
▷ Hood is closed.  
The system starts the engine automatically and  
allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
Safety information  
▷ Air vents are opened.  
DANGER  
Enabling the automatic engine  
start function  
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐  
fore using the system. Otherwise, the engine  
cannot switch on automatically to climatize the  
car's interior.  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐  
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute  
the area in and around the vehicle or enter into  
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐  
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐  
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐  
tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate  
283  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive:  
Switching on via BMW display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Remote Engine Start"  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
4. "Activate now"  
5. "Start"  
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"  
7. Confirm the disclaimer.  
Switching off via BMW display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Switching on/off directly  
General information  
The system switches off automatically after ap‐  
prox. 15 minutes.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
4. "Stop"  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on twice consecutively. The system will  
be available again as soon as the drive-ready  
state is activated and deactivated again.  
Switching off with the Start/Stop  
button  
The system can be switched off directly as fol‐  
lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without op‐  
erating the brake pedal.  
Switching on via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
Switching on via departure time  
General information  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the  
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐  
ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on and off using  
the vehicle key.  
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
The system is switched on once.  
Press the button on the vehicle key three  
times within 1 second.  
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week of the scheduled departure can  
be set.  
After operating the vehicle key, it will take ap‐  
proximately 3 seconds until the engine is  
switched on.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷ Set departure times.  
To switch off the system, press the button again  
three times.  
▷ Activate departure times.  
The climate control function will start approxi‐  
mately 10 minutes before the set departure time  
and continue for approximately 5 more minutes  
after the departure time.  
284  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between  
setting/activating the departure time and the  
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐  
riod of time for the climate control.  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Activate the desired departure time.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on once. The system will be available  
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti‐  
vated and deactivated again.  
Activating the departure time via  
BMW display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Observe the information about the intended use  
of the vehicle.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
Additional information:  
4. Activating the desired departure time:  
Tap on the icon.  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.  
Adjusting the departure time via  
iDrive  
Display  
1. "CAR"  
In the instrument cluster:  
2. "Settings"  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the pre-conditioning.  
The vehicle is not ready to drive.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
The icon on the automatic climate con‐  
trol signals an activated departure time.  
6. Select the desired departure time.  
7. Set the departure time.  
8. Select day of the week, if needed.  
The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start  
is running.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
Adjusting the departure time via  
BMW display key  
The activation of the system is confirmed by  
flashing twice.  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
The parking lights are switched on as long as the  
system is switched on.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
4. Select the desired departure time.  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
7. "OK"  
Ambient air package  
Principle  
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean  
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐  
grances.  
Activating the departure time via  
iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
285  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Fragrancing  
Two different fragrances can be selected in the  
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible  
by replacing the fragrance cartridges.  
General information  
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid  
a habituation effect.  
The following criteria can influence the percep‐  
tion of scents in the vehicle interior:  
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow  
switching between the fragrances.  
▷ Automatic climate control settings.  
▷ Temperature and atmospheric humidity.  
▷ Time of day and season.  
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove  
compartment.  
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐  
hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur  
prior to the trip. The system is automatically  
switched on with the pre-ventilation if fragrancing  
was switched on at the completion of the last  
trip.  
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,  
for instance fatigue.  
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW  
fragrance cartridges.  
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not  
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,  
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.  
Safety information  
▷ The interior temperature is be‐  
tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.  
Warning  
▷ Open the air vents to allow the fragrance to  
flow out.  
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can  
cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐  
functions, and damage to the system. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a  
cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐  
grance cartridge.  
Selecting the fragrance  
The car's interior is fragranced depending on the  
selected fragrance.  
Two different fragrances can be selected in the  
vehicle.  
1. "CAR"  
Ionizer  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Fragrance"  
Principle  
The ionizer cleans the car's interior air of sus‐  
pended particles and improves the air quality.  
5. Select the desired fragrance.  
Switching fragrancing on/off,  
adjusting intensity  
Switching the ionizer on/off  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Fragrance"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
5. "Ionization"  
286  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
5. "Level"  
3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance car‐  
tridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide it  
from the fragrance cartridge.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Display  
The illustrations on the Control Display show the  
actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Fragrance"  
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,  
the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐  
grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐  
ing.  
4. Insert the removed cover on the rear of the  
fragrance cartridge.  
When the fragrance cartridges are empty, a  
Check Control message is displayed once.  
Inserting fragrance cartridges  
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove  
compartment.  
1. Open the glove compartment.  
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the  
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.  
Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐  
fer to page 299.  
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.  
The cartridge holder slides down.  
287  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐  
sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge  
snaps lightly into place.  
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐  
grance indicated on the Control Display.  
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the  
holder.  
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages.  
Make sure that no objects press against the  
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the  
function of the ambient air package could be  
impacted.  
8. Close the glove compartment.  
Removing the fragrance cartridge  
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove  
compartment.  
1. Open the glove compartment.  
Recycling  
Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐  
fer to page 299.  
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken  
to a dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop for  
recycling.  
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.  
The cartridge holder slides down.  
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the  
holder.  
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance  
indicated on the Control Display.  
288  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control,  
such as the garage door, may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a  
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also follow  
the safety information for the hand-held trans‐  
mitter.  
Integrated Universal  
Remote Control  
Compatibility  
If this symbol is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions of the  
system to be controlled, the system is  
generally compatible with the integrated Univer‐  
sal Remote Control.  
Principle  
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the  
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of  
remote-controlled systems such as garage door  
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.  
Additional questions are answered by:  
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.  
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐  
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To  
operate the remote control, the buttons on the  
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐  
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the  
particular system is required in order to program  
the remote control.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐  
tions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐  
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door  
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐  
sible operation.  
289  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐  
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and  
release the hand-held transmitter button for  
2 seconds.  
Control elements on the interior  
mirror  
6.  
▷ The LED lights up green: programming  
completed.  
Release the button.  
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not  
complete.  
Press the button on the interior mirror for  
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐  
cedure three times to complete the pro‐  
gramming procedure.  
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.  
▷ LED, arrow 2.  
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐  
quired for programming.  
If the integrated universal remote control  
remains nonoperational, continue with the  
special features for change code wireless  
systems.  
Programming  
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐  
onds: programming not completed.  
General information  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be  
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐  
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal  
remote control.  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐  
peat steps 3 to 5.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Initial commissioning:  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐  
led system after repeated programming, please  
check if the system to be controlled features a  
rolling code radio system.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the  
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes  
green rapidly. This erases all programming of  
the buttons on the interior mirror.  
Refer to the operating instructions for the sys‐  
tem.  
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐  
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will  
slowly begin flashing orange.  
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the  
integrated Universal Remote Control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system  
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm  
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.  
The required distance depends on the hand-  
held transmitter.  
Please read the operating instructions to find out  
how to synchronize the system.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second  
person.  
5. Press and hold the button of the desired  
function on the hand-held transmitter.  
290  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Synchronizing the universal remote control with  
the system:  
Release the button.  
▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held  
transmitter was detected but program‐  
ming is not complete.  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Press the button on the interior mirror for  
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐  
cedure three times to complete the pro‐  
gramming procedure.  
2. Program the relevant button on the interior  
mirror as described.  
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the  
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds  
for the next step.  
If the integrated universal remote control  
remains nonoperational, continue with the  
special features for change code wireless  
systems.  
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐  
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and  
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step  
up to three times in order to end synchroniza‐  
tion. Once synchronization is complete, the  
programmed function will be carried out.  
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐  
onds: programming not completed.  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
If the programming procedure is not completed,  
the previous programming will remain un‐  
changed.  
Reprogramming individual  
buttons  
Operation  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be  
programmed.  
Warning  
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror  
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐  
lease the button.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control,  
such as the garage door, may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a  
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also follow  
the safety information for the hand-held trans‐  
mitter.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system  
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm  
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.  
The required distance depends on the hand-  
held transmitter.  
5. Press and hold the button of the desired  
function on the hand-held transmitter.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐  
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and  
release the hand-held transmitter button for  
2 seconds.  
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐  
erated using the button on the interior mirror  
while the drive-ready or standby state is  
switched on. To do this, hold down the button  
within receiving range of the system until the  
function is activated. The interior mirror LED  
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐  
mitted.  
6. The LED can light up in different ways.  
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐  
ming procedure is completed.  
291  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Deleting stored functions  
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐  
tions cannot be deleted individually.  
Ashtray  
Front center console  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐  
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately  
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror  
flashes green fast.  
Opening  
1. Push the cover forward until it engages.  
Sun visor  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold  
the ashtray cover upward.  
Folding out  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the  
side.  
Folding in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐  
sor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind  
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror  
lighting switches on.  
Emptying  
Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the  
cup holder.  
292  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Cigarette lighter  
Safety information  
Warning  
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot  
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.  
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette  
lighter falls down or is held against the objects.  
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard.  
There is a risk of damage to property, among  
other potential damage. Take hold of the ciga‐  
rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐  
dren do not use the cigarette lighter.  
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup  
holders.  
Rear center console  
NOTICE  
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can  
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage  
to property, among other potential damage. In‐  
sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again  
after using the socket.  
The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.  
Front center console  
Operation  
Push in the cigarette lighter.  
The cigarette lighter can be re‐  
moved as soon as it pops back  
out.  
Sockets  
Push the cover forward until it engages.  
Principle  
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for  
electrical equipment when standby and drive-  
ready state are switched on.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
293  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐  
patible connectors.  
Front center console  
Safety information  
Warning  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the  
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,  
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be  
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐  
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area  
of unfolding.  
Push the cover forward until it engages.  
NOTICE  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery  
via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle  
may overload or damage the 12 V electrical  
system. There is a risk of damage to property,  
among other potential damage. Only connect  
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the  
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐  
ment.  
A socket is located between the cup holders.  
Pull off the cover.  
Rear center console  
NOTICE  
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can  
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage  
to property, among other potential damage. In‐  
sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again  
after using the socket.  
A socket is located in the center console.  
Pull off the cover.  
294  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
In the cargo area  
Steptronic transmission: in the  
center console  
NOTICE  
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large  
USB connectors, may block or damage the  
cover when it is being opened or closed. There  
is a risk of damage to property, among other  
potential damage. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the cover is clear while opening  
and closing it.  
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo  
area. Unfold the cover.  
USB port  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connection  
of mobile devices to the USB port in the section  
on USB connections.  
Additional information:  
Push the cover forward until it engages.  
USB connections, refer to page 78.  
In the center armrest  
A USB port is located in the center console.  
Properties:  
A USB port is located in the center armrest.  
Properties:  
▷ USB port Type A.  
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data  
transmission.  
▷ USB port Type C.  
▷ For charging of mobile devices.  
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.  
▷ For data transfer.  
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.  
295  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
NOTE  
In the rear center console  
This device has been tested for human exposure  
limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐  
tance of 2 in/5 cm during operation.  
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be  
maintained in every direction when operating the  
device.  
Two USB ports are located in the center console  
in the rear passenger compartment.  
Properties:  
▷ USB port Type C.  
▷ For charging of mobile devices.  
▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.  
Mounting position of the product.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Wireless charging tray  
Principle  
When charging a device that meets the Qi  
standard in the wireless charging tray, any  
metal objects located between the device and  
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage  
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,  
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal  
transmission, between the device and the tray  
may impair the card function. There is a risk of  
injury and risk of damage to property. When  
charging mobile devices, make sure there are  
no objects between the device and the tray.  
The wireless charging tray enables the following  
wireless functions:  
▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐  
bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐  
bile devices, which support the Qi standard.  
▷ Charging the BMW Display key.  
General information  
When inserting the mobile phone, make sure  
there are no objects between it and the wireless  
charging tray.  
During charging, the surface of the tray and the  
mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐  
peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge  
current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐  
lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐  
porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the  
mobile phone owner's manual.  
Overview  
Tray in the center console:  
The charge indicator shows on the Control  
Display whether a mobile phone with Qi capabil‐  
ity is being charged.  
296  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Removing the mobile phone  
1. Open the tray cover.  
2. Remove the mobile phone.  
LED displays  
Color Meaning  
Blue  
The mobile phone is charging.  
1
2
LED  
The blue LED stays illuminated once  
the inserted mobile phone with Qi ca‐  
pability is fully charged.  
Storage area  
Functional requirements  
Orange The mobile phone is not charging.  
▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support  
the required Qi standard.  
Temperature on the mobile phone  
possibly too high or foreign object in  
charging tray.  
If the mobile phone does not support the Qi  
standard, the mobile phone can be charged  
using a special Qi-compatible charging case.  
Red  
The mobile phone is not charging.  
Contact a dealer’s service center or  
another qualified service center or re‐  
pair shop.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
▷ A possible parking operation via Remote  
Control Parking must be completed.  
▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the  
mobile phone.  
Forgotten warning  
General information  
If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten  
warning function, a warning can be output if a  
mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in  
the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐  
cle.  
▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to  
a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; other‐  
wise, the charging function may be impaired.  
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in  
the center of the tray.  
Operation  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster.  
Inserting the mobile phone  
Activating  
1. "CAR"  
The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐  
mum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x  
0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.  
2. "Settings"  
1. Open the tray cover.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. Activate reminder.  
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray  
with the display facing up.  
3. Close the tray cover.  
297  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
▷ AT&T online registration link (https://  
securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐  
booster.com/).  
System limits  
At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in  
the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile  
phone may be limited and some functions may  
no longer work.  
▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://  
www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-  
booster-registration.jsp).  
Before use you must register your booster de‐  
vice with your wireless provider.  
LTE-Compensator - Information  
and User Manual  
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease  
operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐  
sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐  
more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐  
vated by your local BMW dealer.  
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging  
tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and  
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the  
best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-  
Compensator) is used in conjunction with the  
WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this  
booster:  
You must not remove the booster from the car  
nor use it with any other than the preinstalled  
coupling device or antenna. Any modification of  
the existing antenna or coupling device as well as  
the use of other antennas or coupling devices  
will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐  
cense.  
This is a CONSUMER device.  
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐  
VICE with your wireless provider and have your  
provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐  
sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐  
ers may not consent to the use of this device on  
their network. If you are unsure, contact your  
provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐  
proved antennas and cables as specified by the  
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at  
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You  
MUST cease operating this device immediately if  
requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless  
service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐  
tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate  
for calls served by using this device.  
The booster device fulfills the network protection  
standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐  
modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain  
limits.  
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive  
Model Number: LTECOMPB0  
Part Number: 6803145-01  
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0  
Please observe additionally the following infor‐  
mation  
▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register  
their signal boosters by calling their toll-free  
number.  
▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐  
bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t-  
mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).  
▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http://  
www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/  
register-signal-booster.html).  
298  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Front passenger side glove  
compartment  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes  
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐  
partment can be thrown into the car's interior  
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐  
cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐  
ment immediately after using it.  
Storage compartments  
Opening the glove compartment  
General information  
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage  
compartments for stowing objects.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐  
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,  
can be thrown about the car's interior while  
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of  
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a  
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐  
terior.  
Pull the handle.  
The light in the glove compartment switches on.  
Closing the glove compartment  
Fold cover closed.  
Locking the glove compartment  
The glove compartment can be locked with an  
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove  
compartment.  
NOTICE  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐  
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to  
property, among other potential damage. Do  
not use anti-slip pads.  
After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐  
cle key can be handed over without the  
299  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is  
parked by valet parking.  
Safety information  
Additional information:  
Warning  
Integrated key, refer to page 94.  
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or  
glasses, can break in the event of an accident  
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass  
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not use any breakable objects while driving.  
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage  
compartments.  
Driver's side glove  
compartment  
Safety information  
Warning  
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes  
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐  
partment can be thrown into the car's interior  
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐  
cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐  
ment immediately after using it.  
Storage compartment in  
the center console  
Opening the storage  
compartment  
Opening the glove compartment  
Push the cover forward until it engages.  
Closing the storage  
compartment  
Pull the handle.  
Tap the cover on the handle bar. The cover  
closes.  
Closing the glove compartment  
Fold cover closed.  
Storage compartment in  
the rear center console  
Compartments in the doors  
The rear of the center console contains one or  
two storage compartments.  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
300  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Opening the cup holder  
Center armrest, front  
General information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
Opening the storage  
compartment  
Push the cover forward until it engages.  
Press the button.  
Closing the storage  
compartment  
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐  
sole.  
Press cover down until it engages.  
Closing the cup holder  
Tap the cover on the handle bar. The cover  
closes.  
Front cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Rear cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an  
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled  
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions  
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage  
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an  
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled  
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions  
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage  
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐  
301  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Closing the cup holder  
Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.  
NOTICE  
Clothes hooks  
With an open cup holder, the center armrest  
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of  
damage to property, among other potential  
damage. Press back the covers before the cen‐  
ter armrest is folded up.  
General information  
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐  
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.  
Safety information  
Opening and closing the cup  
holder  
Warning  
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐  
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of  
accident. When suspending clothing articles  
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will  
not obstruct the driver's view.  
General information  
The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐  
ent container sizes.  
Opening the cup holder  
Warning  
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a  
risk of objects flying about during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐  
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,  
from the clothes hooks.  
Fold the center armrest forward.  
Press the button and fold out the cup holder  
fully.  
Downsizing the cup holder  
To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded  
in in 2 steps.  
Enlarging the cup holder  
To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it  
in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again  
fully.  
302  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the  
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and  
secure objects and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of damage to property, among  
other potential damage. Make sure that no flu‐  
ids leak in the cargo area.  
Loading  
Safety information  
Steps for Determining Correct  
Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
Warning  
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐  
age them internally and cause a sudden tire  
pressure loss. Driving characteristics may be  
negatively impacted, reducing lane stability,  
lengthening the braking distances and chang‐  
ing the steering response. There is a risk of ac‐  
cident. Pay attention to the permitted load ca‐  
pacity of the tires and never exceed the  
permitted gross weight.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐  
hicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐  
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐  
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is  
Warning  
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐  
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,  
can be thrown about the car's interior while  
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of  
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a  
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐  
terior.  
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That  
weight may not safely exceed the available  
303  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in  
Step 4.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐  
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity of your vehicle.  
General information  
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,  
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to  
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Payload  
Lashing eyes  
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of  
the occupants and the cargo.  
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for  
securing cargo.  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Multifunction hook  
Stowing and securing cargo  
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.  
General information  
A multifunction hook is located on the left side in  
the cargo area.  
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,  
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear  
passenger seat backrests.  
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐  
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the  
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear  
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer  
safety belts in the opposite buckle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about during  
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.  
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to  
property. Only hang lightweight objects from  
the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy  
luggage in the cargo area if it has been appro‐  
priately secured.  
▷ Fold down the rear seat backrests completely  
to stow large cargo.  
▷ Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of  
the backrests.  
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet  
straps or, depending on the equipment, with  
a cargo net or draw straps.  
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
304  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Folding out the multifunction  
hook  
Opening the storage  
compartment  
Press on the multifunction hook and turn until it  
engages.  
Pull the handle.  
With emergency wheel:  
storage compartment  
Net  
under the cargo floor panel  
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the  
left side.  
General information  
There is a storage compartment under the cargo  
floor panel.  
Storage compartment on  
the right side  
Opening the storage  
compartment  
A storage compartment is available on the right  
side of the cargo area.  
Storage compartment on  
the left side  
General information  
A storage compartment is located on the left  
side in the cargo area.  
Fold up the cargo floor panel.  
Closing the storage  
compartment  
Push the cargo floor panel downward.  
305  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.  
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐  
straints or remove them.  
Through-loading system  
Principle  
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down  
the rear seat backrests.  
NOTICE  
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding  
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐  
age to property, among other potential dam‐  
age. Make sure that the area of movement of  
the rear backrest including head restraint is  
clear when folding down.  
General information  
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–  
20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the  
center section can be folded down separately.  
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from  
the cargo area. The center section can be sepa‐  
rately folded down from the rear.  
Folding down the rear seat  
backrest from the cargo area  
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt  
in the rear using the latch plate of another  
safety belt.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐  
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐  
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head  
restraint is clear prior to folding down.  
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt  
into the specially designated fixture on the  
rear shelf.  
Warning  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured  
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;  
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking  
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked  
after folding it back.  
3. Push the corresponding head restraint down  
as far as it will go.  
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area  
to release the rear seat backrest. The un‐  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐  
ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting  
or improper installation of the child seat. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure  
that the child restraint system fits securely  
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the  
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐  
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats  
306  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
locked rear seat backrest moves forward  
slightly.  
With an emergency wheel:  
enlarging the cargo area  
Principle  
The emergency wheel and any related compo‐  
nents can be temporarily removed to enlarge the  
cargo area.  
Removing the emergency wheel  
and the storage compartments  
1. To remove the cargo area floor, pull it upward  
directly behind the rear backrests.  
5. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.  
Folding back the backrest  
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright  
seat position and engage it.  
2. Open the ratchet strap.  
3. Remove the tool holder.  
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on  
the rear shelf.  
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the  
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the  
latch plate engage.  
Folding down the center section  
1. Fold down the center head restraint.  
2. Pull lever and fold the center section forward.  
4. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐  
age well.  
5. Loosen the ratchet strap from the lashing  
eyes.  
307  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
6. Remove the storage compartment.  
7. Remove the storage well.  
8. Insert the cargo floor panel.  
Inserting the emergency wheel  
and the storage compartments  
Proceed in reverse order to insert the emergency  
wheel and the storage compartments.  
Ski and snowboard bag  
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a  
protective jacket in the cargo area.  
Follow the installation and operating instructions  
included in the protective jacket.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment: remove  
the emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount  
the ski and snowboard bag.  
308  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21  

Related Topics

QUICK REFERENCE

Entering
Set-up and use
On the road
Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
General settings
Personal settings
Connections
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lights
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving
Saving fuel

MOBILITY

Refueling
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Operating materials
Maintenance
Replacing components
Breakdown Assistance
Vehicle Care

REFERENCE

Technical data
Appendix